1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
158 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
159 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
171 by the \SpecialChar LyX
176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
178 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
179 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
180 Documentation mailing list:
181 \begin_inset CommandInset href
183 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
199 \begin_inset Newline newline
203 \begin_inset Note Note
206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
207 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
208 \begin_inset Newline newline
213 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
223 LatexCommand tableofcontents
230 \begin_layout Chapter
234 \begin_layout Section
235 What is \SpecialChar LyX
239 \begin_layout Standard
241 is a document preparation system.
242 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
243 scripts, publishable books, business
244 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
245 It is unlike most other
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
255 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
271 pt type, left justified, 5
272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
281 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
285 \begin_layout Standard
286 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
291 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
295 \begin_layout Standard
300 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
301 's philosophy: most importantly,
302 the format of all of the manuals.
303 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
304 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
310 manual describes that, too.
313 \begin_layout Section
318 \begin_layout Standard
319 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
320 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
322 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
323 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
327 \begin_layout Standard
328 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
329 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
330 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
332 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
333 only a vertical scrollbar.
334 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
335 The first case is large images.
336 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
337 image and use the option
348 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
351 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
352 this doesn't work for equations yet.
355 \begin_layout Standard
356 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
357 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
365 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
372 \begin_layout Section
376 \begin_layout Standard
377 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
379 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
381 Just select the manual you want to read from the
388 \begin_layout Section
389 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
393 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
400 \begin_layout Standard
401 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
402 can be configured via the menu
404 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
408 \begin_inset Index idx
411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
418 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
420 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
421 packages are available.
422 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
424 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
426 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
431 \begin_inset space \space{}
434 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
435 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
437 To force \SpecialChar LyX
438 to re-inspect your system, you should use
440 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
444 \begin_inset Index idx
447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
448 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
454 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
455 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
458 \begin_layout Section
461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
463 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
472 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 installed, but you will not be
474 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
475 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
476 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
477 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
478 document can always be output as plain text
482 \begin_layout Standard
483 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
484 or DocBook classes or packages.
485 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
486 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
489 \begin_layout Standard
490 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
491 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
492 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
495 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
503 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
504 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
507 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
511 \begin_inset Index idx
514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
515 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
523 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
530 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
534 \begin_layout Chapter
535 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
539 \begin_layout Section
540 Basic File Operations
541 \begin_inset Index idx
544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
553 \begin_layout Standard
558 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
559 in addition to some more advanced operations:
562 \begin_layout Itemize
584 \begin_layout Itemize
600 arg "buffer-new-template"
606 \begin_layout Itemize
628 \begin_layout Itemize
636 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
640 \begin_layout Itemize
642 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
654 \begin_layout Itemize
666 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
670 \begin_layout Itemize
672 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
680 \begin_layout Itemize
702 \begin_layout Itemize
714 arg "buffer-write-as"
718 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
722 \begin_layout Itemize
724 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
740 \begin_layout Itemize
754 \begin_layout Itemize
768 \begin_layout Standard
769 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
770 a few minor differences.
773 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
784 command lists the available templates.
785 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
786 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
787 and possibly propose text fragments
789 for the document, features
790 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
793 you would otherwise need to
794 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
796 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
800 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
804 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
812 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
818 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
819 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
823 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
831 \begin_layout Standard
832 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
864 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
865 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
866 is just that — a big, blank space.
874 \begin_layout Standard
895 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
900 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
903 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
921 will reload the document from disk.
922 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
923 and want to restore it to the last save.
932 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
933 them as your changes.
936 \begin_layout Section
937 Basic Editing Features
938 \begin_inset Index idx
941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
948 \begin_inset CommandInset label
950 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
957 \begin_layout Standard
958 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
959 can perform cut and paste operations
960 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
961 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
962 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
963 editing features and how to access
965 We will start with cut and paste.
968 \begin_layout Standard
969 As you might expect, the
973 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
974 various other editing features.
975 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
979 \begin_layout Itemize
985 \begin_inset Index idx
988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1017 \begin_layout Itemize
1023 \begin_inset Index idx
1026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1055 \begin_layout Itemize
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1089 \begin_layout Itemize
1093 \begin_inset space ~
1099 \begin_layout Itemize
1103 \begin_inset space ~
1109 \begin_layout Itemize
1113 \begin_inset space ~
1117 \begin_inset space ~
1123 \begin_inset Index idx
1126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1135 \begin_inset Index idx
1138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1153 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1163 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1169 \begin_layout Standard
1170 The first three are self-explanatory.
1171 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1172 and other programs by
1193 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1194 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1199 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1200 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1201 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1202 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1203 into individual cells.
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1212 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1213 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1217 \begin_layout Standard
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1226 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1228 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1230 \begin_inset space ~
1237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1243 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1244 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1245 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1251 \begin_inset space \space{}
1254 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1255 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1258 \begin_inset space ~
1261 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1263 \begin_inset space ~
1267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1280 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1281 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1283 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1287 \begin_inset space ~
1292 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1293 start a new paragraph.
1294 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1295 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1300 \begin_inset space ~
1303 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1309 \begin_inset space ~
1317 \begin_inset space ~
1320 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1323 paste from the primary selection.
1324 This is normally the currently selected text.
1327 \begin_layout Standard
1330 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1332 \begin_inset space ~
1336 \begin_inset space ~
1344 \begin_inset space ~
1348 \begin_inset space ~
1354 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1360 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1363 \begin_inset space ~
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1377 button to skip the current word.
1381 \begin_inset space ~
1386 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1390 \begin_inset space ~
1395 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1397 If the toggle is set, searching for
1398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 will not match the word
1410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1424 Match whole words only
1426 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1427 to only find complete words, e.
1428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1457 offers also an advanced
1460 \begin_inset space ~
1464 \begin_inset space ~
1469 feature that is described in section
1470 \begin_inset space ~
1474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1476 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1483 \begin_layout Standard
1484 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1485 \begin_inset space \space{}
1489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1497 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1499 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1504 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1511 \begin_layout Standard
1515 arg "inset-select-all"
1518 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1519 When the cursor is inside an inset
1522 arg "inset-select-all"
1525 selects the content of the inset.
1529 arg "inset-select-all"
1532 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1537 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1540 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1544 \begin_layout Section
1546 \begin_inset Index idx
1549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1556 \begin_inset Index idx
1559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1568 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1578 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1581 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1584 or the toolbar button
1590 to undo some mistake.
1591 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1593 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1596 or the toolbar button
1603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1610 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1611 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1614 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1617 \begin_layout Standard
1618 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1627 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1628 This is a consequence of the 100
1629 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1632 step undo limit mentioned above.
1635 \begin_layout Standard
1644 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1646 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1650 \begin_layout Section
1652 \begin_inset Index idx
1655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1664 \begin_layout Standard
1665 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1668 \begin_layout Enumerate
1673 \begin_layout Itemize
1678 once anywhere in the edit window.
1679 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1683 \begin_layout Enumerate
1688 \begin_layout Itemize
1695 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1698 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1701 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1702 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1705 \begin_layout Itemize
1706 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1709 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1716 \begin_layout Enumerate
1717 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1721 \begin_layout Standard
1722 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1723 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1727 \begin_layout Section
1729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1731 name "sec:Navigating"
1736 \begin_inset Index idx
1739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 \begin_layout Standard
1750 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1753 \begin_layout Itemize
1758 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1759 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1762 \begin_layout Itemize
1763 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1765 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1767 \begin_inset space ~
1772 or by the toolbar button
1775 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1781 \begin_layout Itemize
1782 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1784 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1787 and use the same menu to return to them.
1788 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1791 \begin_layout Standard
1795 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1800 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1801 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1803 \begin_inset space ~
1808 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1809 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1810 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1811 your last editing position.
1814 \begin_layout Standard
1819 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1823 \begin_layout Subsection
1825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1827 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1832 \begin_inset Index idx
1835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1836 Navigating ! Outline
1842 \begin_inset Index idx
1845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1854 \begin_layout Standard
1855 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1856 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1857 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1865 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1869 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1870 \begin_inset space ~
1874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1876 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1881 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1885 \begin_layout Standard
1886 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1887 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1888 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1889 dialog and to modify the citation.
1892 \begin_layout Standard
1897 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1898 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1900 Labels and References
1902 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1911 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1914 \begin_layout Standard
1915 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1916 you further to control the display.
1921 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1922 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1928 option keeps it in the current view state.
1929 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1930 \begin_inset space ~
1933 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1937 3, the subsections of sections
1938 \begin_inset space ~
1941 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1946 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1947 \begin_inset space ~
1951 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1961 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1964 \begin_layout Standard
1971 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1972 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1986 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1987 So, for example, you can move section
1988 \begin_inset space ~
1992 \begin_inset space ~
1995 2.4 or after section
1996 \begin_inset space ~
2001 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2014 (or the corresponding key bindings
2022 ) you can change the level of sections.
2023 So you can for example make section
2024 \begin_inset space ~
2028 \begin_inset space ~
2032 \begin_inset space ~
2038 \begin_layout Standard
2039 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2040 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2043 \begin_layout Subsection
2044 Horizontal Scrolling
2045 \begin_inset Index idx
2048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2049 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2057 \begin_layout Standard
2059 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2065 \begin_inset space \space{}
2069 \begin_inset space ~
2072 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2073 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2074 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2078 \begin_layout Standard
2079 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2083 \begin_layout Itemize
2085 is used on a small tablet computer
2088 \begin_layout Itemize
2089 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2101 \begin_inset space ~
2114 \begin_layout Itemize
2115 Math constructs with long command names
2118 \begin_layout Standard
2119 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2120 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2122 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2123 windows so that table
2124 \begin_inset space ~
2128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2130 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2135 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2137 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2138 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2141 \begin_layout Standard
2142 \begin_inset Float table
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2150 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2155 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2159 Horizontal scrolling test.
2167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2169 \begin_inset Tabular
2170 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2171 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2172 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2173 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2174 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2216 \begin_layout Section
2217 Input/Word Completion
2218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2220 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2225 \begin_inset Index idx
2228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2235 \begin_inset Index idx
2238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2269 \begin_layout Standard
2271 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2273 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2274 is used to propose completions.
2277 \begin_layout Standard
2278 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2281 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2286 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2293 \begin_inset space ~
2297 \begin_inset space ~
2302 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2306 \begin_inset space ~
2311 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2312 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2316 \begin_inset space ~
2322 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2323 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2324 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2325 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2328 \begin_layout Standard
2330 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2331 completions available.
2336 key to accept a proposed completion.
2337 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2338 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2339 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2346 \begin_layout Standard
2347 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2348 ing options for text.
2350 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2352 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2354 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2357 he special math option
2361 enables characters to be composed.
2362 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2363 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2366 , you can then input the characters
2367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2378 to a formula to get it.
2379 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2380 of the math toolbar.
2381 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2385 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2386 's installation folder.
2388 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2389 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2396 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2401 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2402 In the example above,
2407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2439 \begin_layout Section
2441 \begin_inset Index idx
2444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2451 \begin_inset Index idx
2454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2483 \begin_inset Index idx
2486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2517 \begin_layout Standard
2518 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2532 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2535 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2539 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2540 \begin_inset space ~
2544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2546 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2553 \begin_layout Standard
2557 \begin_inset space ~
2565 \begin_inset space ~
2586 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2590 \begin_layout Labeling
2591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2595 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2596 LatexCommand nomenclature
2598 description "Tabulator key"
2605 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2607 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2608 \begin_inset space ~
2612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2614 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2621 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2625 , especially section
2626 \begin_inset space ~
2630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2632 reference "subsec:Lists"
2638 If you are still confused, look in the
2643 \begin_inset Newline newline
2651 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2652 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2656 \begin_layout Labeling
2657 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2661 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2662 LatexCommand nomenclature
2664 description "Escape key"
2672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2679 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2680 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2683 \begin_layout Labeling
2684 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2690 \begin_inset space ~
2694 \begin_inset space ~
2701 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2702 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2706 \begin_layout Standard
2707 There are three modifier keys:
2710 \begin_layout Labeling
2711 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2729 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2730 LatexCommand nomenclature
2732 description "Control key"
2737 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2738 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2742 \begin_layout Itemize
2751 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2754 \begin_layout Itemize
2763 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2766 \begin_layout Itemize
2775 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2779 \begin_layout Labeling
2780 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2798 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2799 LatexCommand nomenclature
2801 description "Shift key"
2806 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2807 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2810 \begin_layout Labeling
2811 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2829 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2830 LatexCommand nomenclature
2832 description "Alt or Meta key"
2837 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2838 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2839 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2845 \begin_inset Newline newline
2848 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2850 menu accelerator keys
2853 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2854 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2858 \begin_layout Standard
2859 For example, the sequence
2860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2866 \begin_inset space ~
2870 \begin_inset space ~
2876 \begin_inset space ~
2884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2903 \begin_inset space ~
2909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2919 \begin_layout Standard
2924 manual lists all other things bound to the
2932 \begin_layout Standard
2933 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2935 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2936 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2937 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2938 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2939 The \SpecialChar LyX
2940 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2941 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2942 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2944 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2960 followed by a capital
2967 \begin_layout Chapter
2970 \begin_inset Index idx
2973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2983 \begin_layout Section
2985 \begin_inset Index idx
2988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2997 \begin_layout Subsection
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3003 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3004 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3005 numbering schemes, and so on.
3006 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3007 and format the title of your document differently.
3010 \begin_layout Standard
3015 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3016 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3017 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3018 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3019 picks one for you by default.
3020 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3023 \begin_layout Subsection
3025 \begin_inset Index idx
3028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3037 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3044 \begin_layout Standard
3045 You can select a class using the
3047 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3048 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3052 \begin_inset Index idx
3055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3062 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3066 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3070 \begin_layout Standard
3071 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3076 \begin_layout Description
3077 Article for basic articles
3080 \begin_layout Description
3081 Report for basic reports
3084 \begin_layout Description
3085 Book for writing a book
3088 \begin_layout Description
3089 Letter for US-style letters
3092 \begin_layout Standard
3093 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3094 only uses if you have installed
3095 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3096 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3097 distributions will include
3099 Here are some of the classes.
3100 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3102 Special Document Classes
3111 \begin_layout Description
3112 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3115 \begin_layout Description
3116 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3120 \begin_layout Description
3121 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3125 \begin_layout Description
3126 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3127 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3128 There are three article layouts available.
3129 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3130 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3131 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3132 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3137 sequential numbering
3138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3141 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3142 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3143 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3144 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3147 \begin_layout Description
3148 Beamer Layout for presentations
3151 \begin_layout Description
3152 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3153 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3154 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3155 with \SpecialChar LyX
3159 \begin_layout Description
3160 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3163 \begin_layout Description
3165 \begin_inset space ~
3168 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3171 \begin_layout Description
3172 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3175 \begin_layout Description
3176 Foils Used to make transparencies
3179 \begin_layout Description
3180 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3181 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3182 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3183 with \SpecialChar LyX
3187 \begin_layout Description
3188 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3189 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3192 \begin_layout Description
3193 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3196 \begin_layout Description
3197 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3200 \begin_layout Description
3201 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3202 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3203 (Is used by this document.)
3206 \begin_layout Description
3207 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3210 \begin_layout Description
3211 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3214 \begin_layout Description
3219 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3220 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3222 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3226 \begin_layout Description
3227 Slides Used to make transparencies
3230 \begin_layout Description
3232 \begin_inset space ~
3235 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3236 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3239 \begin_layout Description
3240 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3243 \begin_layout Standard
3244 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3246 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3248 Special Document Classes
3255 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3256 of the document classes.
3259 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3263 \begin_layout Standard
3264 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3266 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3267 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3269 \begin_inset Index idx
3272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3289 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3290 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3292 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3295 \begin_layout Standard
3298 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3303 , are highly specialized.
3305 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3306 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3307 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3308 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3309 by some document class.
3310 There are just too many of them.
3311 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3314 \begin_layout Standard
3315 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3323 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3324 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3325 document class for a new file.
3327 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3330 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3337 manual for information on how to install them.
3338 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3344 \begin_layout Standard
3345 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3346 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3347 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3348 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3349 class files to be used for dissertation
3350 s submitted to those universities.
3351 The \SpecialChar LyX
3352 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3354 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3358 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3364 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3367 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3371 name "subsec:Modules"
3376 \begin_inset Index idx
3379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3388 \begin_layout Standard
3389 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3390 chosen document class.
3391 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3392 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3399 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3403 \begin_inset Index idx
3406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3413 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3417 \begin_layout Standard
3418 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3419 packages or file format converters that are not always
3420 installed by default.
3422 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3423 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3424 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3425 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3427 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3428 file without the missing prerequisites.
3429 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3430 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3433 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3437 \begin_inset Index idx
3440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3441 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3447 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3452 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3455 \begin_layout Standard
3456 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3464 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3466 will advise you about these things.
3474 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3478 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3483 \begin_inset Index idx
3486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3487 Document ! Local Layout
3495 \begin_layout Standard
3496 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3497 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3498 : They are intended to be used in
3499 a variety of different documents.
3500 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3501 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3502 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3503 need a specific inset or
3504 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3506 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3509 style only that one time.
3510 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3512 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3530 manual for information on how to use it.
3533 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3537 \begin_layout Standard
3538 Each class has a default set of options.
3539 Here's a quick table describing them:
3542 \begin_layout Standard
3543 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3549 \begin_layout Standard
3551 \begin_inset Tabular
3552 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3553 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3554 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3555 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3556 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3557 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3558 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4012 \begin_layout Standard
4013 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4019 \begin_layout Standard
4020 You're probably also wondering what
4021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4025 \begin_inset space ~
4029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4033 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4034 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4039 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4044 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4054 headings, there are also
4062 headings, and so on.
4063 We will describe these headings fully in section
4064 \begin_inset space ~
4068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4070 reference "subsec:Headings"
4077 \begin_layout Subsection
4079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4081 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4086 \begin_inset Index idx
4089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4096 \begin_inset Index idx
4099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4108 \begin_layout Standard
4109 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4118 \begin_inset space ~
4126 \begin_inset space ~
4131 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4133 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4134 doesn't support special options you want to
4135 use for your document.
4136 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4137 -class and its options, you have to read
4141 \begin_layout Standard
4145 \begin_inset space ~
4152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4158 \begin_inset space ~
4163 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4164 You can choose between the following five options:
4167 \begin_layout Labeling
4168 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4173 Use default page style of current class.
4176 \begin_layout Labeling
4177 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4182 No page numbers or headings.
4185 \begin_layout Labeling
4186 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4194 \begin_layout Labeling
4195 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4200 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4201 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4202 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4203 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4206 \begin_layout Labeling
4207 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4212 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4213 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4219 \begin_inset Index idx
4222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4230 How they are defined is explained in section
4231 \begin_inset space ~
4235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4237 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4244 \begin_layout Standard
4245 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4246 \begin_inset space ~
4250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4252 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4259 \begin_layout Subsection
4260 Paper Size and Orientation
4261 \begin_inset Index idx
4264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4265 Document ! Paper size
4271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4273 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 You can find the following options in the menu
4284 \begin_inset space ~
4291 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4295 \begin_inset Index idx
4298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4307 \begin_layout Labeling
4308 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4312 \begin_inset space ~
4317 What size paper to print on.
4322 \begin_layout Itemize
4328 \begin_layout Itemize
4334 \begin_layout Itemize
4340 \begin_layout Itemize
4346 \begin_layout Itemize
4349 US letter, US legal, US executive
4352 \begin_layout Itemize
4358 \begin_layout Itemize
4365 \begin_layout Labeling
4366 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4371 To choose whether to output as
4382 \begin_layout Labeling
4383 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4387 \begin_inset space ~
4392 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4393 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4396 \begin_layout Subsection
4398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4400 name "subsec:Margins"
4405 \begin_inset Index idx
4408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4415 \begin_inset Index idx
4418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4427 \begin_layout Standard
4428 Paper margins are set in the menu
4430 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4434 \begin_inset Index idx
4437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4446 \begin_layout Standard
4447 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4448 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4449 the paper format and the font size into account.
4452 \begin_layout Subsection
4456 \begin_layout Standard
4457 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4463 That includes the paragraph environments.
4464 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4465 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4466 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4468 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4477 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4479 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4480 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4481 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4484 \begin_layout Section
4485 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4486 \begin_inset Index idx
4489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4490 Paragraph ! Indentation
4498 \begin_layout Subsection
4500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4502 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4509 \begin_layout Standard
4510 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4511 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4514 \begin_layout Standard
4515 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4516 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4517 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4518 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4522 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4528 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4529 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4530 language than English.
4532 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4535 \begin_layout Standard
4536 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4537 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4538 into \SpecialChar LyX
4540 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4543 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4545 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4546 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4547 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4554 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4555 goes to produce a printable file.
4560 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4562 gives you the ability globally to change
4566 these pre-coded spacings.
4567 We will explain more later.
4570 \begin_layout Subsection
4571 Paragraph Separation
4572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4574 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4579 \begin_inset Index idx
4582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4583 Paragraph ! Separation
4591 \begin_layout Standard
4599 \begin_inset space ~
4607 \begin_inset space ~
4614 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4618 \begin_inset Index idx
4621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4627 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4630 \begin_layout Subsection
4634 \begin_layout Standard
4635 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4638 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4640 \begin_inset space ~
4645 dialog and toggle the
4648 \begin_inset space ~
4653 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4656 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4660 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4661 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4665 \begin_layout Standard
4666 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4667 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4670 \begin_layout Subsection
4672 \begin_inset Index idx
4675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4676 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4684 \begin_layout Standard
4687 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4691 \begin_inset Index idx
4694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4703 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4707 \begin_inset space ~
4716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4717 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4723 \begin_inset Index idx
4726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4733 installed to use this feature.
4738 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4740 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4742 \begin_inset space ~
4747 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4748 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4751 \begin_layout Section
4752 Paragraph Environments
4753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4755 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4760 \begin_inset Index idx
4763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4764 Paragraph ! Environments
4770 \begin_inset Index idx
4773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4774 Paragraph environments|(
4782 \begin_layout Subsection
4786 \begin_layout Standard
4787 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4790 \begin_layout Standard
4799 } \SpecialChar ldots
4809 \begin_inset Newline newline
4812 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4814 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4815 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4816 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4825 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 A paragraph environment is simply a
4830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4837 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4838 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4839 scheme, labels, and so on.
4840 Additionally, you can
4841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4848 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4849 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4850 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4851 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4853 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4855 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4858 \begin_layout Standard
4859 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4860 \begin_inset Graphics
4861 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4867 at the left end of the toolbar.
4869 will change the environment of the
4873 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4874 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4875 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4879 \begin_layout Standard
4888 create a new paragraph using the
4892 paragraph environment.
4894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4901 because if you are in one of these environments:
4904 \begin_layout Itemize
4910 \begin_layout Itemize
4916 \begin_layout Itemize
4922 \begin_layout Itemize
4928 \begin_layout Itemize
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4940 \begin_layout Itemize
4946 \begin_layout Standard
4948 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4952 , rather than resetting it to
4957 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4958 \begin_inset space ~
4962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4964 reference "sec:Nesting"
4971 \begin_layout Subsection
4975 \begin_layout Standard
4976 The default paragraph environment is
4981 It creates a plain paragraph.
4983 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4984 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4985 this manual) are in the
4992 \begin_layout Standard
4993 You can nest a paragraph using the
4997 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5005 \begin_layout Subsection
5007 \begin_inset Index idx
5010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5019 \begin_layout Standard
5020 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5021 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5030 for thanks or contact information.
5031 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5032 places all of this on a separate page
5033 along with today's date.
5034 For other types of documents, the title
5035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5042 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5046 \begin_layout Standard
5048 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5062 Here's how you use them:
5065 \begin_layout Itemize
5066 Put the title of your document in the
5073 \begin_layout Itemize
5074 Put the author name in the
5081 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5083 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5089 Note that using this environment is optional.
5090 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5091 will automatically insert today's date.
5092 If you don't want a date, use the option
5094 Suppress default date on front page
5098 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5099 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5101 \begin_inset space ~
5109 \begin_layout Standard
5110 You can use footnotes to insert
5111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5118 or contact information.
5121 \begin_layout Subsection
5123 \begin_inset Index idx
5126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5135 name "subsec:Headings"
5142 \begin_layout Standard
5143 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5145 takes care of the numbering for you.
5148 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5150 \begin_inset Index idx
5153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5154 Section headings ! Numbered
5162 \begin_layout Standard
5163 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5167 \begin_layout Enumerate
5173 \begin_layout Enumerate
5179 \begin_layout Enumerate
5185 \begin_layout Enumerate
5191 \begin_layout Enumerate
5197 \begin_layout Enumerate
5203 \begin_layout Enumerate
5209 \begin_layout Standard
5211 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5212 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5213 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5216 \begin_layout Standard
5217 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5218 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5219 You group the book into chapters.
5221 does a similar grouping:
5224 \begin_layout Itemize
5229 is divided into either
5240 \begin_layout Itemize
5252 \begin_layout Itemize
5264 \begin_layout Itemize
5276 \begin_layout Itemize
5288 \begin_layout Itemize
5300 \begin_layout Standard
5301 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5309 Not all document types use the
5313 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5318 is the top-level heading.
5326 \begin_layout Standard
5331 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5332 labels it with its number,
5333 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5335 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5347 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5349 \begin_inset Index idx
5352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5353 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5361 \begin_layout Standard
5362 The unnumbered section headings have a
5363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5370 at the end of their name.
5371 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5372 the table of contents, see section
5373 \begin_inset space ~
5377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5387 Changing the Numbering
5388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5390 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5398 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5399 in the Table of Contents.
5400 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5402 Just as certain classes start with
5416 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5426 This is something you can change.
5429 \begin_layout Standard
5432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5436 \begin_inset Index idx
5439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5448 \begin_inset space ~
5452 \begin_inset space ~
5457 you will see two counters.
5462 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5463 numbers a section heading.
5464 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5468 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5469 Short Titles of Headings
5470 \begin_inset Index idx
5473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5474 Section headings ! Short titles
5480 \begin_inset Argument 1
5483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5492 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5499 \begin_layout Standard
5500 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5501 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5502 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5503 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5506 \begin_layout Standard
5508 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5509 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5510 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5511 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5514 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5516 \begin_inset space ~
5522 This will insert a box labeled
5523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5527 \begin_inset space ~
5531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5534 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5535 This also works for captions inside floats.
5536 There can only be one short title per title.
5539 \begin_layout Standard
5540 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5547 \begin_layout Standard
5548 The following information applies to all section headings:
5551 \begin_layout Itemize
5552 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5555 \begin_layout Itemize
5556 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5559 \begin_layout Itemize
5560 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5563 \begin_layout Itemize
5564 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5567 \begin_layout Subsection
5571 \begin_layout Standard
5573 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5587 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5588 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5589 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5590 the text they contain.
5591 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5599 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5602 \begin_layout Standard
5603 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5612 when you start a new paragraph.
5613 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5617 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5618 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5619 have to change back to the
5623 environment yourself.
5626 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5635 \begin_inset Index idx
5638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5647 \begin_layout Standard
5648 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5649 time for the differences.
5658 are identical except for one difference:
5662 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5671 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5674 \begin_layout Standard
5675 Here's an example of the
5688 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5690 See – no indentation!
5694 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5695 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5696 the other paragraph.
5699 \begin_layout Standard
5700 Here's another example, this time in the
5707 \begin_layout Quotation
5713 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5714 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5715 the first line, then
5719 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5723 you were quoting other text.
5726 \begin_layout Quotation
5727 Here's a new paragraph.
5728 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5729 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5732 \begin_layout Standard
5733 As the examples show,
5737 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5738 They should put quotes in the
5743 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5747 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5750 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5752 \begin_inset Index idx
5755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5762 \begin_inset Index idx
5765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5781 \begin_layout Standard
5786 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5792 \begin_inset Newline newline
5795 Which I did not rehearse!
5799 It could be much worse.
5800 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5802 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5803 indented a bit more than the first.
5804 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5810 \begin_inset Newline newline
5813 And make things look fine
5814 \begin_inset Newline newline
5820 arg "newline-insert newline"
5826 \begin_layout Standard
5831 does not indent both margins.
5832 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5833 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5836 arg "newline-insert newline"
5842 \begin_layout Subsection
5844 \begin_inset Index idx
5847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5863 \begin_layout Standard
5865 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5875 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5876 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5885 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5886 lets you provide your own label.
5887 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5888 describing some general features of all four of them.
5891 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5898 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5899 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5908 reset the environment to
5912 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5913 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5914 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5918 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5922 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5929 \begin_layout Standard
5930 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5931 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5932 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5934 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5935 you read all of section
5936 \begin_inset space ~
5940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5942 reference "sec:Nesting"
5949 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5951 \begin_inset Index idx
5954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5970 \begin_layout Standard
5971 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5975 paragraph environment.
5976 It has the following properties:
5979 \begin_layout Itemize
5980 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5984 \begin_layout Itemize
5986 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5989 \begin_layout Itemize
5990 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5994 \begin_layout Itemize
5995 The items can have any length.
5997 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5998 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6005 \begin_layout Itemize
6010 environment inside another
6014 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6018 \begin_layout Itemize
6019 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6022 \begin_layout Itemize
6024 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6027 \begin_layout Itemize
6029 \begin_inset space ~
6033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6035 reference "sec:Nesting"
6039 for a full explanation of nesting.
6043 \begin_layout Standard
6044 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6053 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6056 \begin_layout Standard
6057 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6058 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6061 \begin_layout Itemize
6062 The label for the first level
6066 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6070 \begin_layout Itemize
6071 The label for the second level is a dash.
6075 \begin_layout Itemize
6076 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6080 \begin_layout Itemize
6081 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6085 \begin_layout Itemize
6086 Back out to the third level.
6090 \begin_layout Itemize
6091 Back to the second level.
6095 \begin_layout Itemize
6096 Back to the outermost level.
6099 \begin_layout Standard
6100 These are the default labels for an
6105 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6110 dialog in the submenu
6115 \begin_inset Index idx
6118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6124 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6128 \begin_layout Standard
6129 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6130 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6132 \begin_inset space ~
6136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6138 reference "sec:Nesting"
6145 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6147 \begin_inset Index idx
6150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6159 name "sec:Enumerate"
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6171 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6172 It has these properties:
6175 \begin_layout Enumerate
6176 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6180 \begin_layout Enumerate
6181 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6185 \begin_layout Enumerate
6187 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6190 \begin_layout Enumerate
6195 environment resets the counter to one.
6198 \begin_layout Enumerate
6211 \begin_layout Enumerate
6212 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6213 Items can have any length.
6216 \begin_layout Enumerate
6217 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6220 \begin_layout Enumerate
6221 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6224 \begin_layout Enumerate
6225 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6229 \begin_layout Standard
6238 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6240 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6241 labels the four different levels in an
6248 \begin_layout Enumerate
6249 The first level of an
6253 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6257 \begin_layout Enumerate
6258 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6262 \begin_layout Enumerate
6263 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6267 \begin_layout Enumerate
6268 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6271 \begin_layout Enumerate
6272 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6277 \begin_layout Enumerate
6278 Back to the third level
6282 \begin_layout Enumerate
6283 Back to the second level.
6287 \begin_layout Enumerate
6288 Back to the outermost level.
6291 \begin_layout Standard
6292 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6296 environment, see section
6297 \begin_inset space ~
6301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6303 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6308 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6312 \begin_layout Standard
6313 There is more to nesting
6317 environments than we've stated here.
6318 You should read section
6319 \begin_inset space ~
6323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6325 reference "sec:Nesting"
6329 to learn more about nesting.
6332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6334 \begin_inset Index idx
6337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6346 \begin_layout Standard
6347 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6351 list has no fixed label.
6352 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6361 of the first line as the label.
6365 \begin_layout Description
6366 Example: This is an example of the
6373 \begin_layout Standard
6375 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6379 \begin_layout Standard
6381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6388 it is meant that the first usage of the
6392 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6394 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6402 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6407 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6408 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6410 \begin_inset space ~
6416 \begin_inset space ~
6420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6422 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6426 for more information.) Here is an example:
6429 \begin_layout Description
6431 \begin_inset space ~
6434 Example: This one shows how to use a
6437 \begin_inset space ~
6449 \begin_layout Description
6450 Usage: You should use the
6454 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6455 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6457 It's not a good idea to use a
6461 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6462 You're better off using
6474 paragraphs into them.
6477 \begin_layout Description
6478 Nesting: You can nest
6482 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6486 \begin_layout Standard
6487 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6488 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6489 them from the first line.
6492 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6494 \begin_inset Index idx
6497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6506 \begin_layout Standard
6511 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6512 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6516 \begin_layout Standard
6525 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6527 Here are its properties:
6530 \begin_layout Labeling
6531 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6533 \begin_inset space ~
6536 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6545 of each line as the item label.
6550 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6551 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6552 space as described above.
6555 \begin_layout Labeling
6556 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6557 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6558 uses different margins for the item label and the
6559 body of the item text.
6560 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6561 label width plus a little extra space.
6565 \begin_layout Labeling
6566 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6568 \begin_inset space ~
6571 width \SpecialChar LyX
6572 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6573 If the label width is larger, the label
6574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6581 into the first line.
6582 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6583 margin of the rest of the item text.
6586 \begin_layout Labeling
6587 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6589 \begin_inset space ~
6592 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6597 environment has the same left margin.
6598 \begin_inset Newline newline
6601 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6604 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6606 \begin_inset space ~
6611 dialog (toolbar button
6614 arg "layout-paragraph"
6621 \begin_inset space ~
6626 determines the default label width.
6627 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6636 multiple times instead.
6637 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6647 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6650 \begin_inset space ~
6655 every time you alter a label in a
6660 \begin_inset Newline newline
6663 The predefined default width is the length of
6664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6672 \begin_inset space ~
6678 \begin_layout Standard
6683 list the same way as the
6687 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6693 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6702 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6703 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6705 \begin_inset space ~
6709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6711 reference "sec:Nesting"
6715 to learn about nesting.
6718 \begin_layout Standard
6719 There is yet another feature of the
6723 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6724 left-justifies the item labels by
6726 You can use additional
6730 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6731 justifies the item label.
6736 are documented in section
6737 \begin_inset space ~
6741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6743 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6748 Here are some examples:
6751 \begin_layout Labeling
6752 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6753 Left The default for
6760 \begin_layout Labeling
6761 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6762 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6769 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6772 \begin_layout Labeling
6773 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6774 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6778 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6785 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6788 \begin_layout Subsection
6790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6792 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6797 \begin_inset Index idx
6800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6809 \begin_layout Standard
6810 The features described in this section require that the module
6812 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6814 is loaded in the document settings.
6815 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6821 \begin_inset Index idx
6824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6834 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6835 Custom Enumerate Lists
6836 \begin_inset Index idx
6839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6840 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6848 \begin_layout Standard
6850 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6853 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6856 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6857 There you add the command
6860 \begin_layout Standard
6868 \begin_layout Standard
6880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6881 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6882 Code, look at section
6883 \begin_inset space ~
6887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6889 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6902 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6909 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6910 For capital Roman numerals replace
6922 in the command above.
6923 For Arabic numerals use
6931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6938 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6953 \begin_layout Standard
6955 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6963 You can only number 26
6964 \begin_inset space ~
6967 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6975 \begin_layout Standard
6976 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6977 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6980 \begin_layout Standard
6981 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6984 \begin_layout Enumerate
6985 \begin_inset Argument 1
6988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7014 \begin_layout Enumerate
7015 \begin_inset Argument 1
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7041 \begin_layout Enumerate
7046 \begin_layout Enumerate
7047 \begin_inset Argument 1
7050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7074 \begin_layout Enumerate
7075 \begin_inset Argument 1
7078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7104 \begin_layout Standard
7105 For this list these commands were used:
7108 \begin_layout Standard
7119 \begin_inset Newline newline
7127 \begin_inset Newline newline
7135 \begin_inset Newline newline
7145 \begin_layout Standard
7152 makes the label emphasized and
7161 \begin_layout Standard
7162 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7170 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7171 lists until you change the definition.
7179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7181 \begin_inset Index idx
7184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7185 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7193 \begin_layout Standard
7194 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7197 \begin_layout Enumerate
7198 \begin_inset Argument 1
7201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7220 \begin_inset Note Note
7223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7224 goes back to default numbering
7232 \begin_layout Enumerate
7236 \begin_layout Standard
7240 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7244 \begin_layout Standard
7245 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7250 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7251 to indicate that it is a resumed
7252 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7253 , but in the output.
7256 \begin_layout Standard
7257 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7265 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7274 \begin_layout Standard
7275 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7277 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7278 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7279 of a normal enumeration.
7280 There, insert the command
7283 \begin_layout Standard
7289 \begin_layout Standard
7294 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7298 \begin_layout Enumerate
7302 \begin_layout Enumerate
7306 \begin_layout Standard
7307 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7310 \begin_layout Enumerate
7311 \begin_inset Argument 1
7314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7330 This enumeration starts at 4
7333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7335 \begin_inset Index idx
7338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7347 \begin_layout Standard
7348 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7350 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7353 \begin_layout Itemize
7357 \begin_layout Itemize
7358 with standard spacing
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7362 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7364 Add there the command
7368 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7371 \begin_layout Itemize
7372 \begin_inset Argument 1
7375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 \begin_layout Itemize
7398 \begin_layout Itemize
7402 \begin_layout Standard
7403 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7410 \begin_inset Index idx
7413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7421 For more information see its documentation,
7422 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7432 \begin_layout Standard
7433 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7435 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7436 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7440 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7443 \begin_layout Enumerate
7444 \begin_inset Argument 1
7447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7455 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7468 \begin_layout Enumerate
7469 with negative indentation
7472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7473 Further Customization
7474 \begin_inset Index idx
7477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7478 Lists ! Customization
7486 \begin_layout Standard
7487 You can also change the style of description lists.
7491 \begin_layout Standard
7497 \begin_layout Standard
7498 changes the description label font, the command
7501 \begin_layout Standard
7507 \begin_layout Standard
7508 sets the list style.
7511 \begin_layout Standard
7512 An example where the command
7515 \begin_layout Standard
7520 itshape, style=nextline
7523 \begin_layout Standard
7527 \begin_layout Description
7529 \begin_inset space ~
7533 \begin_inset Argument 1
7536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7542 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7544 itshape, style=nextline
7554 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7555 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7559 \begin_layout Description
7561 \begin_inset space ~
7564 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7565 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7566 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7569 \begin_layout Standard
7570 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7576 \begin_inset Index idx
7579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7587 For more information see its documentation
7588 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7598 \begin_layout Subsection
7600 \begin_inset Index idx
7603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7612 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7614 \begin_inset space ~
7617 Address: An Overview
7620 \begin_layout Standard
7621 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7622 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7630 \begin_inset space ~
7636 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7637 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7638 gags on the document.
7639 In contrast, you can use the
7646 \begin_inset space ~
7651 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7652 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7656 \begin_layout Standard
7657 Of course, you're not limited to using
7664 \begin_inset space ~
7673 \begin_inset space ~
7678 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7679 some European academic papers.
7682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7686 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7693 \begin_layout Standard
7698 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7699 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7703 \begin_inset space ~
7708 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7709 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7710 Here's an example of each:
7713 \begin_layout Right Address
7715 \begin_inset Newline newline
7719 \begin_inset Newline newline
7723 \begin_inset Newline newline
7726 When is it? What is today?
7729 \begin_layout Standard
7733 \begin_inset space ~
7739 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7741 the largest block of text on a single line.
7742 Here's an example of the
7749 \begin_layout Address
7751 \begin_inset Newline newline
7754 Where do I send this
7755 \begin_inset Newline newline
7758 Your post office and country
7761 \begin_layout Standard
7762 As you can see, both
7769 \begin_inset space ~
7774 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7779 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7780 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7786 This makes sense, since
7794 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7795 Thus, you have to use
7802 arg "newline-insert newline"
7807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7808 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7810 \begin_inset space ~
7814 \begin_inset space ~
7819 ) to start a new line in an
7826 \begin_inset space ~
7834 \begin_layout Subsection
7838 \begin_layout Standard
7839 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7840 or list of references.
7842 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7845 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7847 \begin_inset Index idx
7850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7859 \begin_layout Standard
7864 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7865 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7866 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7867 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7881 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7882 The book document classes ignores the
7886 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7890 in a letter document class.
7893 \begin_layout Standard
7898 environment does several things for you.
7899 First, it puts the centered label
7900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7908 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7910 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7911 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7912 the subsequent text.
7913 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7915 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7919 \begin_layout Standard
7920 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7924 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7925 The new paragraph will still be in the
7930 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7931 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7934 \begin_layout Standard
7935 \begin_inset Float figure
7942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7944 \begin_inset Graphics
7945 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7953 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7958 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7980 We would love to demonstrate the
7984 environment, but since this document is in the
7985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7992 class, we can't do this.
7993 We inserted it therefore as figure
7994 \begin_inset space ~
7998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8000 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8005 If you have never heard of an
8006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8013 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8016 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8018 \begin_inset Index idx
8021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8030 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8037 \begin_layout Standard
8042 environment is used to list references.
8043 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8044 only use it at the end of the document.
8056 \begin_layout Standard
8057 When you first open a
8061 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8062 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8078 depending on the document class.
8079 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8080 Each paragraph of the
8084 environment is a bibliography entry.
8089 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8090 Each new paragraph is still in the
8097 \begin_layout Standard
8098 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8099 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8101 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8103 handling, have a look at section
8104 \begin_inset space ~
8108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8110 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8117 \begin_layout Subsection
8118 Special Environments
8121 \begin_layout Standard
8123 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8124 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8127 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8132 \begin_inset Index idx
8135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8145 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8152 \begin_layout Standard
8158 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8160 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8165 key as a fixed whitespace.
8169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8182 \begin_inset space ~
8187 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8205 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8208 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8211 arg "newline-insert newline"
8228 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8229 So, when you finish using the
8234 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8235 Also, you can nest the
8240 environment inside of others.
8243 \begin_layout Standard
8244 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8247 \begin_layout Itemize
8251 arg "newline-insert newline"
8254 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8259 \begin_inset space \space{}
8269 arg "newline-insert newline"
8275 \begin_layout Itemize
8279 arg "newline-insert newline"
8289 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8295 \begin_layout Itemize
8296 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8297 You must put at least one
8301 in any line you want blank.
8302 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8306 \begin_layout Itemize
8307 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8311 since that will insert
8316 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8319 arg "self-insert \""
8325 \begin_layout Standard
8329 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8333 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8337 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8341 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8345 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8346 printf("Hello World!
8351 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8355 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8359 \begin_layout Standard
8360 This is just the standard
8361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8372 \begin_layout Standard
8378 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8380 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8381 as if you used a typewriter.
8382 \begin_inset Index idx
8385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8386 Paragraph environments|)
8391 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8394 Program Code Listings
8399 \begin_inset space ~
8407 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8411 \begin_inset Index idx
8414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8423 \begin_layout Standard
8428 environment is similar to the
8433 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8434 computer console text.
8439 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8453 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8454 you can have empty lines.
8467 \begin_layout Itemize
8468 have a certain language and a text style
8471 \begin_layout Itemize
8472 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8473 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8474 and \SpecialChar TeX
8478 \begin_layout Standard
8479 Because of these properties
8483 works like a typewriter.
8487 \begin_layout Verbatim
8491 \begin_layout Verbatim
8494 The following 2 lines are empty:
8497 \begin_layout Verbatim
8501 \begin_layout Verbatim
8505 \begin_layout Verbatim
8506 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8511 \begin_layout Standard
8516 environment is identical to
8520 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8521 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8528 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8532 \begin_layout Section
8533 Nesting Environments
8534 \begin_inset Index idx
8537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8538 Nesting ! Environments
8544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8553 \begin_layout Subsection
8557 \begin_layout Standard
8559 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8561 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8563 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8565 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8577 \begin_layout Enumerate
8581 \begin_layout Enumerate
8586 \begin_layout Enumerate
8590 \begin_layout Enumerate
8595 \begin_layout Enumerate
8599 \begin_layout Standard
8600 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8601 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8603 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8605 \begin_inset space ~
8609 \begin_inset space ~
8617 \begin_inset space ~
8621 \begin_inset space ~
8626 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8628 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8631 arg "depth-increment"
8637 arg "depth-decrement"
8651 arg "depth-increment"
8657 arg "depth-decrement"
8661 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8662 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8666 \begin_layout Standard
8667 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8668 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8669 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8670 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8671 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8674 \begin_layout Standard
8675 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8677 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8679 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8682 \begin_layout Subsection
8683 What You Can and Can't Nest
8686 \begin_layout Standard
8687 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8688 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8691 \begin_layout Standard
8692 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8693 than a simple yes or no.
8694 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8697 \begin_layout Itemize
8698 Completely unnestable
8701 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8707 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8711 \begin_layout Standard
8712 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8713 environments have them:
8716 \begin_layout Description
8717 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8718 Can't nest into them.
8722 \begin_layout Itemize
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 \begin_layout Itemize
8746 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Description
8755 \begin_inset space ~
8758 Nestable You can nest them.
8759 You can nest other things into them.
8763 \begin_layout Itemize
8769 \begin_layout Itemize
8775 \begin_layout Itemize
8781 \begin_layout Itemize
8787 \begin_layout Itemize
8793 \begin_layout Itemize
8799 \begin_layout Itemize
8805 \begin_layout Itemize
8812 \begin_layout Itemize
8818 \begin_layout Itemize
8825 \begin_layout Description
8826 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8827 You can't nest anything into them.
8831 \begin_layout Itemize
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8843 \begin_layout Itemize
8849 \begin_layout Itemize
8855 \begin_layout Itemize
8861 \begin_layout Itemize
8867 \begin_layout Itemize
8873 \begin_layout Itemize
8879 \begin_layout Itemize
8885 \begin_layout Itemize
8891 \begin_layout Itemize
8897 \begin_layout Itemize
8903 \begin_layout Itemize
8909 \begin_layout Itemize
8913 \begin_inset space ~
8919 \begin_layout Itemize
8926 \begin_layout Standard
8927 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8935 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8945 \begin_inset space ~
8948 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8949 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8950 nested section headings violate this.
8958 \begin_layout Subsection
8959 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8960 \begin_inset Index idx
8963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8964 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8972 \begin_layout Standard
8973 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8974 affected by nesting anyhow.
8978 \begin_layout Itemize
8982 \begin_layout Itemize
8986 \begin_layout Itemize
8990 \begin_layout Standard
8992 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9000 Figures and tables in
9004 are not affected by this.
9009 Have a look at section
9010 \begin_inset space ~
9014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9016 reference "sec:Floats"
9020 for more information about
9027 \begin_layout Standard
9029 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9030 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9034 \begin_layout Standard
9035 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9043 of its own, it behaves just like a
9044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9051 paragraph environment.
9052 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9056 \begin_layout Standard
9057 Here's an example with a table:
9060 \begin_layout Enumerate
9065 \begin_layout Enumerate
9066 This is (a) and it's nested.
9070 \begin_layout Standard
9071 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9077 \begin_layout Standard
9079 \begin_inset Tabular
9080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9167 \begin_layout Standard
9168 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9175 \begin_layout Enumerate
9177 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9181 \begin_layout Enumerate
9185 \begin_layout Standard
9186 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9189 \begin_layout Enumerate
9194 \begin_layout Enumerate
9195 This is (a) and it's nested.
9199 \begin_layout Standard
9200 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9206 \begin_layout Standard
9208 \begin_inset Tabular
9209 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9210 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9211 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9212 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9296 \begin_layout Standard
9297 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9303 \begin_layout Enumerate
9310 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9313 \begin_layout Enumerate
9317 \begin_layout Standard
9318 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9322 \begin_layout Standard
9323 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9326 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9329 \begin_layout Enumerate
9334 \begin_layout Enumerate
9335 This is (a) and it's nested.
9338 \begin_layout Standard
9339 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9345 \begin_layout Standard
9347 \begin_inset Tabular
9348 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9349 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9350 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9351 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9436 \begin_layout Standard
9437 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9443 \begin_layout Enumerate
9445 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9452 \begin_layout Enumerate
9456 \begin_layout Standard
9457 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9463 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9464 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9468 \begin_layout Subsection
9469 Usage and General Features
9472 \begin_layout Standard
9473 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9474 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9483 is the innermost possible depth.
9484 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9487 \begin_layout Enumerate
9488 level #1 – outermost
9492 \begin_layout Enumerate
9497 \begin_layout Enumerate
9502 \begin_layout Enumerate
9507 \begin_layout Itemize
9512 \begin_layout Itemize
9521 \begin_layout Standard
9522 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9523 both of them in the example.
9524 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9534 For example, if we tried to nest another
9539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9546 , we would get errors.
9549 \begin_layout Subsection
9551 \begin_inset Index idx
9554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9563 \begin_layout Standard
9564 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9565 We have several examples of nested environments.
9566 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9570 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9571 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9574 \begin_layout Labeling
9575 \labelwidthstring MMM
9576 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9585 \begin_layout Labeling
9586 \labelwidthstring MMM
9587 #2-a This is level #2.
9588 We created it by using
9591 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9597 arg "depth-increment"
9604 \begin_layout Labeling
9605 \labelwidthstring MMM
9606 #3-a This is level #3.
9607 This time, we just enter
9614 arg "depth-increment"
9618 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9622 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9628 arg "depth-increment"
9635 \begin_layout Standard
9640 environment, nested inside of
9641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9649 So, it's at level #4.
9650 We did this by entering
9653 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9659 arg "depth-increment"
9662 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9667 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9683 \begin_layout Standard
9688 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9691 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9697 \begin_layout Labeling
9698 \labelwidthstring MMM
9699 #4-a This is level #4.
9703 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9706 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9711 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9715 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9720 keep nesting things inside
9721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9732 \begin_layout Labeling
9733 \labelwidthstring MMM
9734 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9739 \begin_layout Labeling
9740 \labelwidthstring MMM
9741 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9742 and this is level #6.
9743 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9747 \begin_layout Labeling
9748 \labelwidthstring MMM
9749 #5-b Back to level #5.
9753 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9759 arg "depth-decrement"
9766 \begin_layout Labeling
9767 \labelwidthstring MMM
9771 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9777 arg "depth-decrement"
9780 , we're back at level #4.
9784 \begin_layout Labeling
9785 \labelwidthstring MMM
9786 #3-b Back to level #3.
9787 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9791 \begin_layout Labeling
9792 \labelwidthstring MMM
9793 #2-b Back to level #2.
9798 \begin_layout Labeling
9799 \labelwidthstring MMM
9800 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9801 After this sentence, we will enter
9805 and change the paragraph environment back to
9812 \begin_layout Standard
9813 We could have also used the
9829 environment in place of the
9834 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9837 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9838 Example 2: Inheritance
9841 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9842 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9845 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9854 arg "depth-increment"
9858 \begin_inset Newline newline
9861 which, we will change to the
9869 \begin_layout Enumerate
9874 environment, at level #2.
9877 \begin_layout Enumerate
9878 Notice how the nested
9882 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9886 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9890 \begin_layout Standard
9891 We ended this example by entering
9896 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9900 and reset the nesting depth by using
9903 arg "depth-decrement"
9909 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9910 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9919 \begin_inset Argument 1
9922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9923 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9931 \begin_layout Enumerate
9932 This is level #1, in an
9936 paragraph environment.
9937 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9941 \begin_layout Enumerate
9946 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9952 arg "depth-increment"
9956 Now, what happens if we nest an
9960 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9961 label be? An asterisk?
9965 \begin_layout Itemize
9975 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9976 So, its label is a bullet.
9977 (We got here by using
9980 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9986 arg "depth-increment"
9989 , then changing the environment to
9997 \begin_layout Itemize
9998 Here's level #4, produced using
10001 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10007 arg "depth-increment"
10011 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10016 \begin_layout Enumerate
10018 to get to level #5.
10019 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10024 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10028 , because we are in the
10036 environment (that is, it is an
10051 \begin_layout Enumerate
10056 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10057 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10061 \begin_layout Enumerate
10062 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10065 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10068 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10071 \begin_layout Enumerate
10075 arg "depth-decrement"
10078 to decrease the depth after the next
10081 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10088 \begin_layout Enumerate
10090 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10095 \begin_layout Enumerate
10097 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10098 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10102 \begin_layout Enumerate
10103 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10112 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10117 reset the counter for the label.
10121 \begin_layout Enumerate
10125 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10131 arg "depth-decrement"
10134 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10135 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10136 into the twofold-nested
10144 \begin_layout Enumerate
10145 The same thing happens if we do another
10148 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10154 arg "depth-decrement"
10157 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10160 \begin_layout Standard
10161 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10166 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10177 The number of other
10181 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10188 The same rule applies for the
10192 environment, as well.
10195 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10196 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10199 \begin_layout Enumerate
10200 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10201 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10202 the same detail with how we did it.
10211 \begin_layout Standard
10219 arg "depth-increment"
10226 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10227 the example in parentheses someplace.
10228 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10229 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10230 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10234 \begin_layout Enumerate
10239 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10243 \begin_layout Verse
10244 Now we will add verse.
10245 \begin_inset Newline newline
10248 It will get much worse.
10249 \begin_inset Newline newline
10259 arg "depth-increment"
10269 \begin_layout Verse
10270 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10271 \begin_inset Newline newline
10274 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10275 \begin_inset Newline newline
10281 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10289 \begin_layout Verse
10290 Here comes a table:
10294 \begin_layout Standard
10295 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10301 \begin_layout Standard
10303 \begin_inset Tabular
10304 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10305 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10306 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10307 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10392 \begin_layout Verse
10396 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10406 arg "depth-increment"
10412 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10418 \begin_inset Newline newline
10426 arg "depth-decrement"
10433 \begin_layout Enumerate
10438 : level #1) This is another item.
10439 Note that selecting a
10443 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10444 3 times to put the table inside the
10452 \begin_layout Quotation
10453 We're now ending the
10457 list and changing to
10462 We're still at level #1.
10463 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10464 The next set of paragraphs is a
10465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10472 We will nest both the
10479 \begin_inset space ~
10484 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10488 for the letter body.
10492 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10495 to preserve the depth.
10496 Remember that you need to use
10499 arg "newline-insert newline"
10502 to create multiple lines inside the
10509 \begin_inset space ~
10519 \begin_layout Right Address
10521 \begin_inset Newline newline
10524 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10525 \begin_inset Newline newline
10531 \begin_layout Address
10533 \begin_inset space ~
10539 \begin_layout Quotation
10540 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10544 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10545 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10546 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10547 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10548 as soon as possible.
10549 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10552 \begin_layout Quotation
10553 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10554 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10555 with your order, along with payment.
10558 \begin_layout Quotation
10559 We thank you again for your patience.
10562 \begin_layout Address
10564 \begin_inset Newline newline
10571 \begin_layout Quotation
10572 That ends that example!
10575 \begin_layout Standard
10576 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10577 gives you a lot of power with just
10579 We could have easily nested an
10600 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10603 \begin_layout Subsection
10605 \begin_inset Index idx
10608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10609 Nesting ! Separation
10615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10617 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10624 \begin_layout Standard
10625 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10627 For example you need two different enumerations:
10630 \begin_layout Enumerate
10635 \begin_layout Enumerate
10640 \begin_layout Enumerate
10644 \begin_layout Standard
10645 \begin_inset Separator plain
10651 \begin_layout Itemize
10657 \begin_layout Standard
10658 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10664 \begin_layout Enumerate
10668 \begin_layout Enumerate
10672 \begin_layout Enumerate
10676 \begin_layout Standard
10677 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10678 list item and use the menu
10680 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10681 Separated <Name> Above
10685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10686 Separated <Name> Below
10689 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10690 ) and before or behind it the
10692 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10695 \begin_layout Standard
10696 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10697 (red arrow in LyX).
10698 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10699 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10702 \begin_layout Standard
10703 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10706 arg "paragraph-break"
10713 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10716 \begin_layout Section
10717 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10718 \begin_inset Index idx
10721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10730 \begin_layout Standard
10731 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10732 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10734 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10735 be broken at the end of a line.
10736 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10740 \begin_layout Subsection
10742 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10744 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10749 \begin_inset Index idx
10752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10761 \begin_layout Standard
10762 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10763 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10764 ) not to break the line at
10766 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10769 \begin_layout Quote
10770 Further documentation is given in section
10771 \begin_inset Newline newline
10775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10777 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10785 \begin_layout Standard
10786 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10801 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10810 A protected space is set with
10812 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10813 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10815 \begin_inset space ~
10823 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10829 \begin_layout Subsection
10831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10833 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10838 \begin_inset Index idx
10841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10842 Spacing ! Horizontal
10850 \begin_layout Standard
10851 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10853 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10854 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10858 The length units are listed in Appendix
10859 \begin_inset space ~
10863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10865 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10876 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10881 \begin_inset Index idx
10884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10885 Spaces ! Inter-word
10893 \begin_layout Standard
10894 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10895 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10896 at the ends of sentences.
10897 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10898 automatically takes care about this.
10899 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10900 followed by a period; see section
10901 \begin_inset space ~
10905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10907 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10912 To insert a normal space, select
10914 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10915 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10917 \begin_inset space ~
10925 arg "space-insert normal"
10931 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10935 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10940 \begin_inset Index idx
10943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10952 \begin_layout Standard
10954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10961 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10970 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10971 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10972 inside abbreviations:
10975 \begin_layout Quote
10977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10981 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10984 \begin_layout Standard
10985 or between values and units.
10986 Compare for example this:
10987 \begin_inset Newline newline
10991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10995 \begin_inset Newline newline
10998 10 kg (normal space
11001 \begin_layout Standard
11002 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11004 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11005 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11015 arg "space-insert thin"
11021 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11025 \begin_layout Standard
11026 You can also insert the following space types:
11029 \begin_layout Description
11031 \begin_inset space ~
11035 \begin_inset space ~
11038 space A line with a
11039 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11043 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11047 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11050 negative thin space between the arrows.
11053 \begin_layout Description
11055 \begin_inset space ~
11059 \begin_inset space ~
11062 space A line with a
11063 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11067 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11071 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11074 negative medium space between the arrows.
11077 \begin_layout Description
11079 \begin_inset space ~
11083 \begin_inset space ~
11086 space A line with a
11087 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11091 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11095 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11098 negative thick space between the arrows.
11101 \begin_layout Description
11103 \begin_inset space ~
11107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11111 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11115 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11119 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11123 \begin_inset space ~
11127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11130 em) space between the arrows.
11133 \begin_layout Description
11135 \begin_inset space ~
11139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11143 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11147 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11151 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11155 \begin_inset space ~
11159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11162 em) space between the arrows.
11165 \begin_layout Description
11167 \begin_inset space ~
11171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11175 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11179 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11183 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11187 \begin_inset space ~
11191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11194 em) space between the arrows.
11197 \begin_layout Description
11199 \begin_inset space ~
11203 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11207 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11212 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11219 cm space between the arrows.
11222 \begin_layout Standard
11224 \begin_inset space ~
11228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11230 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11234 lists the different space sizes.
11237 \begin_layout Standard
11238 \begin_inset Float table
11245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11246 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11251 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11255 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11265 \begin_inset Tabular
11266 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11267 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11268 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11269 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11385 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11542 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11544 \begin_inset Index idx
11547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11556 \begin_layout Standard
11557 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11558 feature for adding extra space
11559 in a uniform fashion.
11560 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11561 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11562 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11563 equally between themselves.
11566 \begin_layout Standard
11567 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11570 \begin_layout Quote
11572 This is on the left side
11573 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11576 This is on the right
11579 \begin_layout Quote
11582 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11586 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11592 \begin_layout Quote
11595 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11599 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11603 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11609 \begin_layout Standard
11610 That was an example in the
11616 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11620 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11624 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11627 is one in a standard paragraph.
11628 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11632 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11635 \begin_layout Standard
11636 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11639 \begin_inset space ~
11644 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11647 \begin_layout Standard
11649 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11653 \begin_inset space ~
11659 \begin_layout Standard
11661 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11665 \begin_inset space ~
11671 \begin_layout Standard
11673 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11677 \begin_inset space ~
11683 \begin_layout Standard
11685 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11689 \begin_inset space ~
11695 \begin_layout Standard
11697 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11701 \begin_inset space ~
11707 \begin_layout Standard
11709 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11713 \begin_inset space ~
11719 \begin_layout Standard
11720 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11728 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11732 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11734 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11735 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11739 option in the space dialog.
11747 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11751 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11756 \begin_inset Index idx
11759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11768 \begin_layout Standard
11769 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11770 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11773 \begin_layout Standard
11774 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11777 What is correct English?:
11778 \begin_inset Newline newline
11782 \begin_inset Newline newline
11786 \begin_inset space ~
11789 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11790 \begin_inset Newline newline
11794 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11805 \begin_inset Newline newline
11809 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11820 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11826 \begin_layout Standard
11828 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11833 \begin_inset space ~
11837 \begin_inset space ~
11841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11845 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11848 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11852 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11858 \begin_inset space ~
11862 \begin_inset space ~
11866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11869 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11878 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11879 That is why it is named
11880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11888 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11889 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11893 \begin_layout Subsection
11895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11897 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11902 \begin_inset Index idx
11905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11914 \begin_layout Standard
11915 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11917 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11918 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11920 \begin_inset space ~
11926 There you find the following sizes:
11929 \begin_layout Standard
11942 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11943 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11948 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11951 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11953 \begin_inset space ~
11959 \begin_inset Index idx
11962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11963 Document ! Settings
11968 for the paragraph separation.
11969 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11980 \begin_layout Standard
11986 \begin_inset Index idx
11989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11995 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11996 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12001 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12002 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12011 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12020 s are described in section
12021 \begin_inset space ~
12025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12027 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12036 If there are several
12040 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12041 You can therefore use
12045 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12048 \begin_layout Standard
12053 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12054 \begin_inset space ~
12058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12060 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12067 \begin_layout Standard
12068 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12078 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12079 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12091 \begin_layout Subsection
12092 Paragraph Alignment
12093 \begin_inset Index idx
12096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12097 Paragraph ! Alignment
12105 \begin_layout Standard
12106 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12108 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12111 dialog (toolbar button
12114 arg "layout-paragraph"
12118 There are five possibilities:
12121 \begin_layout Itemize
12129 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12135 \begin_layout Itemize
12143 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12149 \begin_layout Itemize
12157 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12163 \begin_layout Itemize
12171 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12177 \begin_layout Itemize
12185 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12191 \begin_layout Standard
12192 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12193 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12194 the left and right margins.
12195 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12198 \begin_layout Standard
12200 This paragraph is right aligned,
12203 \begin_layout Standard
12205 this one is centered,
12208 \begin_layout Standard
12210 this one is left aligned.
12213 \begin_layout Subsection
12215 \begin_inset Index idx
12218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12219 Page breaks ! Forced
12225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12227 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12234 \begin_layout Standard
12235 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12236 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12237 force a page break where you want one.
12238 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12239 is good at page breaking.
12240 Only if you use a lot of
12244 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12245 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12248 \begin_layout Standard
12249 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12250 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12254 have to change the page breaking.
12257 \begin_layout Standard
12258 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12260 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12263 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12265 \begin_inset space ~
12271 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12273 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12274 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12276 \begin_inset space ~
12281 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12283 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12284 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12287 \begin_layout Standard
12288 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12289 at the top of a page.
12290 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12292 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12293 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12294 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12298 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12302 to learn more about
12309 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12313 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12318 \begin_inset Index idx
12321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12322 Page breaks ! Clear
12330 \begin_layout Standard
12331 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12332 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12333 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12334 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12335 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12338 \begin_layout Standard
12339 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12341 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12342 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12344 \begin_inset space ~
12350 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12352 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12353 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12355 \begin_inset space ~
12359 \begin_inset space ~
12364 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12365 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12368 \begin_layout Subsection
12370 \begin_inset Index idx
12373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12382 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12389 \begin_layout Standard
12390 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12392 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12394 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12395 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12397 \begin_inset space ~
12401 \begin_inset space ~
12409 arg "newline-insert newline"
12413 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12415 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12416 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12418 \begin_inset space ~
12422 \begin_inset space ~
12430 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12433 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12435 This is useful to avoid
12436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12443 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12446 \begin_layout Standard
12447 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12448 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12450 very good at line breaking.
12451 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12452 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12453 \begin_inset space ~
12457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12459 reference "sec:Quote"
12464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12466 reference "sec:Verse"
12471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12473 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12480 \begin_layout Subsection
12482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12484 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12489 \begin_inset Index idx
12492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12501 \begin_layout Standard
12503 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12514 \begin_layout Standard
12518 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12519 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12521 \begin_inset space ~
12526 you can insert horizontal lines.
12527 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12528 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12529 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12532 \begin_layout Standard
12534 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12545 \begin_layout Section
12546 Characters and Symbols
12549 \begin_layout Standard
12550 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12551 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12552 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12560 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12564 for information on how this is done.
12567 \begin_layout Standard
12568 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12573 dialog via the menu
12575 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12576 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12582 \begin_layout Standard
12583 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12591 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12592 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12594 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12602 \begin_layout Section
12603 Fonts and Text Styles
12604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12606 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12613 \begin_layout Subsection
12615 \begin_inset Index idx
12618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12627 \begin_layout Standard
12628 There are two types of fonts:
12631 \begin_layout Description
12633 \begin_inset space ~
12637 \begin_inset Index idx
12640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12646 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12647 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12651 characters) in the font.
12652 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12653 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12654 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12655 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12656 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12657 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12658 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12659 \begin_inset Newline newline
12662 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12663 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12664 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12665 sizes than at small ones.
12666 \begin_inset Newline newline
12680 \begin_inset space ~
12688 \begin_layout Description
12690 \begin_inset space ~
12694 \begin_inset Index idx
12697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12703 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12704 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12705 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12706 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12707 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12708 image manipulation program.
12709 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12710 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12711 \begin_inset space ~
12714 pixels high up to 34
12715 \begin_inset space ~
12718 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12719 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12720 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12722 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12723 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12724 \begin_inset Newline newline
12727 Bitmap fonts are named
12730 \begin_inset space ~
12735 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12738 \begin_layout Standard
12739 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12740 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12741 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12742 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12743 use scalable fonts.
12746 \begin_layout Standard
12747 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12750 \begin_layout Standard
12751 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12753 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12755 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12758 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12759 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12760 font to emphasize text, you use an
12761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12769 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12771 In \SpecialChar LyX
12772 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12776 \begin_layout Subsection
12779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12781 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12788 \begin_layout Standard
12789 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12790 used its own fonts.
12791 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12792 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12795 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12796 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12797 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12798 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12799 to a word processor.
12800 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12801 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12802 files are very portable across
12803 different machines.
12804 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12805 has increased a lot
12806 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12809 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12811 \begin_inset space ~
12815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12817 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12822 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12823 code in the document
12824 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12827 \begin_layout Standard
12828 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12829 engines that are also able directly
12830 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12832 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12834 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12836 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12837 that is installed on your system.
12838 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12841 \begin_layout Standard
12842 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12850 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12851 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12859 \begin_layout Subsection
12860 Document Font and Font size
12861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12863 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12868 \begin_inset Index idx
12871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12878 \begin_inset Index idx
12881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12890 \begin_layout Standard
12891 You can set the document fonts in the
12893 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12897 \begin_inset Index idx
12900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12901 Document ! Settings
12911 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12912 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12915 \begin_inset space ~
12924 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12926 \begin_inset space ~
12929 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12932 \begin_layout Standard
12937 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12938 This requires that you use
12950 as the output format, i.
12951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12955 \begin_inset space \space{}
12958 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12959 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12960 installed (see section
12961 \begin_inset space ~
12965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12967 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12972 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12974 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12975 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12977 \begin_inset space ~
12980 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12981 cannot determine the family.
12982 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12983 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12986 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12989 \begin_layout Standard
12990 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12991 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12996 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13002 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13004 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13006 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13009 font encoding, this is
13010 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13011 , depending on the document language,
13014 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13015 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13023 \begin_inset space ~
13029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13039 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13040 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13048 \begin_inset space ~
13054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13062 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13083 European Computer Modern
13086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13094 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13097 \begin_layout Standard
13102 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13103 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13108 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13111 \begin_inset space ~
13116 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13122 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13123 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13126 \begin_layout Itemize
13130 \begin_inset space ~
13135 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13148 \begin_inset space ~
13153 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13154 community in order to replace
13158 as the default font.
13159 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13160 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13163 \begin_inset space ~
13176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13177 One difference is improved kerning.
13185 \begin_layout Itemize
13186 If you do not like the look of
13194 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13199 \begin_inset space ~
13205 \begin_inset space ~
13215 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13216 \begin_inset space ~
13219 serif and typewriter fonts,
13223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13224 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13231 \begin_inset space ~
13240 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13245 \begin_inset space \space{}
13253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13257 \begin_inset space \space{}
13263 \begin_inset space ~
13271 \begin_inset space ~
13281 but you can also select your own.
13282 \begin_inset Newline newline
13285 The differences between roman,
13288 \begin_inset space ~
13297 fonts are explained in section
13298 \begin_inset space ~
13302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13304 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13309 \begin_inset Newline newline
13315 \begin_inset space ~
13320 was originally designed for newspapers.
13321 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13322 into the small newspaper columns.
13326 \begin_inset space ~
13331 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13334 \begin_layout Standard
13335 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13348 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13353 depends on the class you are using.
13354 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13357 \begin_layout Standard
13358 Note that the font size is the
13363 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13364 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13365 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13366 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13369 \begin_inset space ~
13375 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13376 \begin_inset space ~
13380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13382 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13389 \begin_layout Standard
13393 \begin_inset space ~
13398 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13400 \begin_inset space ~
13403 serif or typewriter.
13408 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13418 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13421 \begin_layout Standard
13426 LaTeX font encoding
13428 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13429 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13435 \begin_inset Index idx
13438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13446 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13448 \begin_inset space ~
13452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13454 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13461 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13462 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13463 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13467 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13475 \begin_layout Standard
13476 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13478 Use Old Style Figures
13482 Use True Small Caps
13485 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13488 Use Old Style Figures
13490 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13492 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13500 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13504 Use True Small Caps
13506 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13507 of scaled capitals.
13508 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13509 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13510 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13514 \begin_layout Standard
13516 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13517 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13518 provided by the font package (or the
13522 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13527 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13533 \begin_layout Standard
13538 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13539 a font to display the script characters.
13543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13544 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13550 \begin_inset Index idx
13553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13560 So this has no effect for the document language
13576 \begin_layout Standard
13579 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13581 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13582 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13588 \begin_inset Index idx
13591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13593 packages ! microtype
13602 \begin_layout Standard
13605 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13607 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13612 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13613 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13619 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13620 \begin_inset space ~
13624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13626 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13636 \begin_layout Standard
13637 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13641 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13649 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13654 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13655 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13657 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13659 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13662 dialog, see section
13663 \begin_inset space ~
13667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13669 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13681 \begin_layout Subsection
13685 \begin_layout Standard
13686 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13687 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13689 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13690 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13691 choose a math font in the dialog
13693 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13697 \begin_inset Index idx
13700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13701 Document ! Settings
13707 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13708 automatically selects a math font.
13709 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13710 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13719 \begin_inset space ~
13725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13730 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13731 document font is available.
13734 \begin_layout Standard
13735 Note that the math font will not be used for
13739 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13745 or by the insertion of the command
13752 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13753 \begin_inset space ~
13757 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13758 while the math characters do not.
13760 \begin_inset space ~
13763 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13766 \begin_inset space ~
13774 \begin_inset space ~
13779 in the document font settings.
13782 \begin_layout Standard
13783 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13784 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13785 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13786 font (in most cases
13787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13793 \begin_inset space ~
13799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13802 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13803 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13811 \begin_inset space ~
13817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13823 \begin_layout Subsection
13825 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13827 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13831 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13835 name "subsec:charstyles"
13842 \begin_inset Index idx
13845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13852 \begin_inset Index idx
13855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13864 \begin_layout Standard
13865 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13866 automatically changes the
13867 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13870 style for certain paragraph environments.
13872 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13873 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13875 This is where we meet the concept of
13881 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13883 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13887 \begin_layout Standard
13889 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13894 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13896 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13909 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13918 e., available with all document classes.
13919 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13923 for specific purposes.
13924 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13927 \begin_layout Standard
13929 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13930 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13940 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13944 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13957 — you customized the
13962 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13963 among them, encourage the use of
13975 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13976 \begin_inset space ~
13980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13982 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13987 Rather than fiddling with
13991 , they encourage the use of
13995 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14000 \begin_inset Quotes els
14004 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14007 ), not their form (
14008 \begin_inset Quotes els
14012 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14016 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14017 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14018 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14019 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14020 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14021 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14027 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14031 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14032 With a semantic markup (such as
14036 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14041 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14043 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14044 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14047 \begin_layout Standard
14049 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14050 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14051 by \SpecialChar LyX
14057 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14059 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14060 Builtin Text Styles
14061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14063 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14070 \begin_layout Standard
14072 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14073 The two builtin text styles can be
14074 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14078 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14082 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14083 both of these styles
14086 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14094 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14100 \begin_layout Standard
14105 style, do one of the following:
14108 \begin_layout Itemize
14109 click on the toolbar button
14118 \begin_layout Itemize
14119 use the key binding
14126 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14130 \begin_layout Itemize
14132 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14140 arg "dialog-show character"
14146 arg "dialog-show character"
14149 ) as described in section
14150 \begin_inset space ~
14154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14156 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14165 \begin_layout Standard
14166 These commands are all toggles.
14171 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14174 \begin_layout Standard
14175 One typically uses the
14179 style for proper names.
14181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14188 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14194 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14198 \begin_layout Standard
14200 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14205 is producing text in
14209 , but the definition can be changed.
14214 \begin_layout Standard
14216 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14218 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14226 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14233 \begin_layout Itemize
14234 clicking on the toolbar button
14243 \begin_layout Itemize
14244 using the keybindings
14251 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14255 \begin_layout Itemize
14257 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14265 arg "dialog-show character"
14271 arg "dialog-show character"
14274 ) as described in section
14275 \begin_inset space ~
14279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14281 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14290 \begin_layout Standard
14295 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14297 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14299 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14302 packages use a different font
14303 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14304 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14310 \begin_layout Standard
14311 We've been using the
14315 style all over the place in this document.
14316 Here's one more example:
14319 \begin_layout Quotation
14323 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14325 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14331 \begin_layout Standard
14332 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14333 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14334 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14335 the common tendency to overuse
14336 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14338 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14343 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14347 \begin_layout Standard
14349 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14350 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14351 only as font changes and integrated in the
14359 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14362 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14369 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14371 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14375 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14378 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14380 \begin_inset space ~
14383 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14385 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14391 arg "dialog-show character"
14397 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14399 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14405 arg "dialog-show character"
14409 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14413 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14415 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14419 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14426 \begin_layout Standard
14428 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14429 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14431 \begin_inset space ~
14435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14437 reference "subsec:Modules"
14444 ), or local layout settings (see section
14445 \begin_inset space ~
14449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14451 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14456 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14460 markup for specific functions.
14461 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14466 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14476 \begin_inset Quotes els
14480 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14486 \begin_layout Standard
14488 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14489 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14497 \begin_layout Standard
14499 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14500 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14505 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14506 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14507 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14512 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14513 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14518 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14526 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14527 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14528 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14529 \begin_inset Flex Code
14532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14534 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14543 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14548 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14557 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14562 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14571 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14572 on screen their formal appearance.
14577 \begin_layout Subsection
14579 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14581 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14585 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14591 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14593 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14599 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14601 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14607 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14612 \begin_inset Index idx
14615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14624 \begin_layout Standard
14625 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14626 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14629 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14631 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14633 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14637 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14638 the properties of text passages
14639 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14643 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14644 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14645 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14646 from ordinary dialog.
14647 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14651 \begin_layout Standard
14653 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14654 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14655 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14656 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14657 the properties of the respective text passages.
14662 comes in as a last resort.
14667 \begin_layout Standard
14668 Before we document how to
14669 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14670 use custom character style
14671 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14672 tweak the text properties
14674 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14675 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14677 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14681 \begin_inset Newline newline
14684 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14685 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14688 \begin_layout Standard
14690 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14691 use custom character styles
14692 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14693 tweak text properties
14696 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14699 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14701 \begin_inset space ~
14704 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14706 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14712 arg "dialog-show character"
14717 dialog or press the toolbar button
14720 arg "dialog-show character"
14725 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14728 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14729 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14731 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14734 property that you can choose.
14735 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14738 \begin_inset space ~
14743 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14745 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14749 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14751 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14756 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14757 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14758 environments all at once.
14761 \begin_layout Standard
14763 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14765 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14768 properties, and their options (in addition to
14771 \begin_inset space ~
14777 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14781 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14789 \begin_layout Labeling
14790 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14804 The possible options are:
14808 \begin_layout Labeling
14809 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14814 This is the Roman font family.
14815 Normally a serif font.
14816 It's also the default family.
14826 \begin_layout Labeling
14827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14831 \begin_inset space ~
14838 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14850 \begin_layout Labeling
14851 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14858 This is the Typewriter font family.
14864 arg "font-typewriter"
14870 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14874 \begin_layout Standard
14876 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14877 The general differences of these families are:
14880 \begin_layout Itemize
14882 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14887 fonts use characters with serifs.
14888 These are the small
14889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14896 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14897 The following example shows the difference:
14898 \begin_inset Newline newline
14902 \begin_inset Newline newline
14907 text without serifs
14910 \begin_inset Newline newline
14913 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14914 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14921 \begin_layout Itemize
14923 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14928 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14929 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14930 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14933 \begin_layout Itemize
14935 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14948 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14966 \begin_inset Newline newline
14970 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14975 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14986 \begin_inset Note Note
14989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14991 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14992 For more on phantoms see section
14993 \begin_inset space ~
14997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14999 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15009 \begin_inset Newline newline
15018 \begin_layout Labeling
15019 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15024 This corresponds to the print weight.
15029 \begin_layout Labeling
15030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15035 This is the Medium font series.
15036 It's also the default series.
15039 \begin_layout Labeling
15040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15047 This is the Bold font series.
15060 \begin_layout Labeling
15061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15066 As the name implies.
15071 \begin_layout Labeling
15072 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15077 This is the Upright font shape.
15078 It's also the default shape.
15081 \begin_layout Labeling
15082 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15092 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15097 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15102 s the Italic font shape
15108 \begin_layout Labeling
15109 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15116 This is the Slanted font shape
15118 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15119 , this is different from italic).
15122 \begin_layout Labeling
15123 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15127 \begin_inset space ~
15134 This is the Small caps font shape
15141 \begin_layout Labeling
15142 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15147 Alters the text color.
15148 Note that not all DVI
15149 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15151 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15154 viewers are able to display colors.
15156 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15160 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15162 \begin_inset space ~
15169 , which means that the document default color set in
15171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15172 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15178 \begin_inset space ~
15184 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15186 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15190 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15270 \begin_inset Index idx
15273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15282 \begin_layout Labeling
15283 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15288 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15289 the language of the document.
15290 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15291 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15292 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15295 in blue to indicate the change
15296 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15297 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15301 \begin_inset Newline newline
15304 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15306 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15307 When using the spell checking (see section
15308 \begin_inset space ~
15312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15314 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15318 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15319 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15321 \begin_inset Newline newline
15324 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15326 Exclude from Spellchecking
15329 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15332 \begin_layout Labeling
15333 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15338 Alters the size of the font.
15340 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15342 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15346 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15349 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15350 document font size.
15351 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15352 the details, but a general description of what
15358 \begin_layout Labeling
15359 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15380 arg "font-size tiny"
15386 \begin_layout Labeling
15387 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15408 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15414 \begin_layout Labeling
15415 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15436 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15442 \begin_layout Labeling
15443 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15464 arg "font-size small"
15470 \begin_layout Labeling
15471 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15485 It's also the default size.
15489 arg "font-size normal"
15495 \begin_layout Labeling
15496 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15517 arg "font-size large"
15523 \begin_layout Labeling
15524 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15545 arg "font-size larger"
15551 \begin_layout Labeling
15552 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15573 arg "font-size largest"
15579 \begin_layout Labeling
15580 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15601 arg "font-size huge"
15607 \begin_layout Labeling
15608 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15629 arg "font-size giant"
15635 \begin_layout Labeling
15636 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15641 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15661 arg "font-size increase"
15667 \begin_layout Labeling
15668 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15673 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15693 arg "font-size decrease"
15700 \begin_layout Standard
15705 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15706 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15708 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15709 — use those instead.
15710 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15713 \begin_layout Labeling
15714 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15716 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15720 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15726 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15727 change a few other things at the character level
15728 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15729 have text passages being underlined
15733 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15734 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15735 days, when you could not change fonts.
15736 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15737 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15738 because some people
15742 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15749 \begin_layout Labeling
15750 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15752 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15759 This is text with emphasize on
15762 This might seem like the same as
15766 , but it is actually a bit different.
15772 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15774 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15775 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15779 \begin_layout Labeling
15780 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15782 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15787 Don't use underlining.
15792 \begin_layout Labeling
15793 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15795 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15799 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15807 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15809 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15818 arg "font-underline"
15824 \begin_inset Newline newline
15828 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15831 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15832 when you could not change fonts.
15833 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15834 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15835 because some people
15839 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15844 \begin_layout Labeling
15845 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15849 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15851 \begin_inset space ~
15860 This is text with Double under
15861 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15863 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15872 arg "font-underunderline"
15876 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15878 \begin_inset Newline newline
15881 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15882 about double underbar
15887 \begin_layout Labeling
15888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15892 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15894 \begin_inset space ~
15903 This is text with Wavy under
15904 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15906 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15915 arg "font-underwave"
15919 \begin_inset Newline newline
15922 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15923 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15924 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15929 \begin_layout Labeling
15930 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15932 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15937 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15943 \begin_layout Labeling
15944 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15946 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15951 Don't use strikethrough.
15954 \begin_layout Labeling
15955 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15959 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15961 \begin_inset space ~
15965 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15973 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15975 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15976 Single strikethrough
15984 arg "font-strikeout"
15988 \begin_inset Newline newline
15991 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15992 changed in the meantime.
15995 \begin_layout Labeling
15996 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15998 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16002 \begin_inset space ~
16006 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16008 \begin_inset space ~
16012 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16020 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16022 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16028 \begin_inset Newline newline
16031 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16035 \begin_layout Standard
16037 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16038 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16039 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16040 \begin_inset space ~
16044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16046 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16053 \begin_layout Itemize
16055 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16062 This is text with emphasize on
16067 \begin_layout Itemize
16071 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16078 This is text with Noun on.
16080 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16087 , this is a logical attribute.
16088 Normally it's equivalent to
16091 \begin_inset space ~
16101 \begin_layout Standard
16102 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16103 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16105 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16110 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16111 chosen a new character style
16112 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16113 applied a text property
16116 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16119 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16121 \begin_inset space ~
16124 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16126 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16132 arg "dialog-show character"
16140 arg "dialog-show character"
16143 ) dialog, the settings are
16144 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16148 You can activate the
16149 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16151 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16152 last applied properties
16154 by using the toolbar button
16157 arg "textstyle-apply"
16161 The button lets you apply
16162 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16163 your custom character style
16164 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16167 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16169 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16170 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16171 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16172 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16177 \begin_layout Standard
16178 To completely reset the
16179 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16181 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16182 text properties of a selection
16184 to the default, use
16185 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16187 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16197 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16202 from the menu of the toolbar button
16205 arg "textstyle-apply"
16212 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16213 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16214 you just set the shape to
16215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16233 \begin_inset space ~
16247 \begin_layout Standard
16249 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16250 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16258 \begin_inset space ~
16270 \begin_layout Itemize
16272 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16285 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16303 \begin_inset Newline newline
16307 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16321 \begin_inset Note Note
16324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16325 For more on phantoms see section
16326 \begin_inset space ~
16330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16332 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16342 \begin_inset Newline newline
16348 \begin_layout Itemize
16350 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16355 fonts use characters with serifs.
16356 These are the small
16357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16364 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16365 The following example shows the difference:
16366 \begin_inset Newline newline
16370 \begin_inset Newline newline
16375 text without serifs
16378 \begin_inset Newline newline
16381 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16382 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16389 \begin_layout Itemize
16391 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16396 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16397 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16398 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16403 \begin_layout Standard
16405 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16413 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16414 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16417 \begin_inset space ~
16422 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16423 the property to be removed.
16424 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16425 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16426 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16444 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16445 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16453 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16457 \begin_inset space ~
16462 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16473 If you, for example, set
16474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16492 \begin_inset space ~
16497 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16506 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16511 \begin_layout Standard
16513 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16516 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16517 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16520 \begin_layout Section
16521 Printing and Previewing
16524 \begin_layout Subsection
16528 \begin_layout Standard
16529 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16530 using \SpecialChar LyX
16531 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16532 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16533 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16534 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16536 Additional Features
16541 \begin_layout Standard
16543 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16546 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16547 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16548 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16551 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16552 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16553 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16554 to turn your writing into printable output.
16555 This happens in two stages:
16558 \begin_layout Enumerate
16559 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16560 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16562 a file with the extension,
16563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16577 \begin_layout Enumerate
16578 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16579 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16580 to use the commands in the
16584 file to produce printable output.
16587 \begin_layout Subsection
16588 Output file formats
16589 \begin_inset Index idx
16592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16601 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16608 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16609 Simple text (ASCII)
16610 \begin_inset Index idx
16613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16614 File formats ! ASCII
16622 \begin_layout Standard
16623 This file type has the extension
16624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16636 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16640 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16647 \begin_layout Standard
16648 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16650 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16651 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16653 \begin_inset space ~
16659 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16660 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16661 bibliography (section
16662 \begin_inset space ~
16666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16668 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16673 If your document includes such material, use
16675 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16676 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16678 \begin_inset space ~
16682 \begin_inset space ~
16686 \begin_inset space ~
16694 \begin_inset space ~
16698 \begin_inset space ~
16704 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16705 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16708 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16711 \begin_inset Index idx
16714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16715 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16724 \begin_layout Standard
16725 This file type has the extension
16726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16737 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16740 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16741 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16742 -Errors or to process it manually
16743 with console commands.
16744 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16745 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16746 's temporary directory whenever you
16747 view or export your document.
16750 \begin_layout Standard
16751 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16752 -file using the menu
16754 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16755 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16759 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16760 export variants are explained in section
16761 \begin_inset space ~
16765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16767 reference "subsec:Export"
16774 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16776 \begin_inset Index idx
16779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16788 \begin_layout Standard
16789 This file type has the extension
16790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16810 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16811 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16812 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16816 \begin_layout Standard
16817 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16818 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16819 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16820 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16821 when you view the DVI.
16822 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16825 \begin_layout Standard
16826 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16828 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16829 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16834 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16835 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16837 \begin_inset space ~
16843 The latter option uses the program
16845 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16851 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16854 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16855 font access (see section
16856 \begin_inset space ~
16860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16862 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16867 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16868 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16873 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16875 \begin_inset Index idx
16878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16879 File formats ! PostScript
16887 \begin_layout Standard
16888 This file type has the extension
16889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16901 PostScript was developed by the company
16905 as a printer language.
16906 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16908 PostScript can be seen as a
16909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16912 programming language
16913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16916 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16921 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16928 \begin_inset Index idx
16931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16933 packages ! pstricks
16943 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16946 \begin_layout Standard
16947 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16951 Encapsulated PostScript
16952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16955 (EPS, file extension
16956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16968 As \SpecialChar LyX
16969 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16970 convert them in the background to EPS.
16971 If, for example, you have 50
16972 \begin_inset space ~
16975 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16977 \begin_inset space ~
16980 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16981 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16983 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16984 EPS to avoid this problem.
16987 \begin_layout Standard
16988 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16990 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16991 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16999 \begin_inset Index idx
17002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17009 \begin_inset Index idx
17012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17021 \begin_layout Standard
17022 This file type has the extension
17023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17039 Portable Document Format
17040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17047 was derived from PostScript.
17048 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17057 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17058 looks exactly the same.
17061 \begin_layout Standard
17062 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17066 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17070 (JPG, file extension
17071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17098 Portable Network Graphics
17099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17102 (PNG, file extension
17103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17115 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17116 converts them in the
17117 background to one of these formats.
17118 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17119 will slow down your workflow.
17120 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17123 \begin_layout Standard
17124 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17126 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17132 \begin_layout Description
17134 \begin_inset space ~
17137 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17141 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17144 \begin_layout Description
17146 \begin_inset space ~
17153 ) This uses the program
17155 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17158 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17161 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17164 is a new engine, derived from
17168 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17169 access (see section
17170 \begin_inset space ~
17174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17176 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17181 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17182 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17187 \begin_layout Description
17189 \begin_inset space ~
17196 ) This uses the program
17201 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17207 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17208 font access (see section
17209 \begin_inset space ~
17213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17215 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17220 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17221 vertically written Japanese.
17224 \begin_layout Description
17226 \begin_inset space ~
17229 (cropped) This is the same as
17232 \begin_inset space ~
17237 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17238 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17239 to generate good-looking
17240 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17243 \begin_layout Description
17245 \begin_inset space ~
17248 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17252 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17256 \begin_layout Description
17258 \begin_inset space ~
17261 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17265 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17266 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17270 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17271 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17274 \begin_layout Standard
17278 \begin_inset space ~
17287 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17288 works without problems.
17289 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17290 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17294 \begin_inset space ~
17302 \begin_inset space ~
17307 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17315 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17317 \begin_inset Index idx
17320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17321 FileFormats ! XHTML
17327 \begin_inset Index idx
17330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17339 \begin_layout Standard
17340 This file type has the extension
17341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17353 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17354 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17355 When \SpecialChar LyX
17356 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17357 suitable for the purpose.
17358 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17361 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17364 between different formats, which are described in section
17366 Math Output in XHTML
17371 \begin_inset space ~
17379 \begin_layout Standard
17380 XHTML output remains
17381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17388 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17389 features are supported yet.
17393 and the World Wide Web
17397 Additional Features
17399 manual, for more information.
17402 \begin_layout Standard
17403 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17405 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17406 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17412 \begin_layout Subsection
17414 \begin_inset Index idx
17417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17426 \begin_layout Standard
17427 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17428 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17437 or use the toolbar button
17444 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17445 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17446 \begin_inset space ~
17450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17452 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17456 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17458 \begin_inset space ~
17462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17464 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17469 Further output formats can be selected via
17471 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17472 View (Other Formats)
17474 or the toolbar button
17483 \begin_layout Standard
17484 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17485 viewer window using the menu
17487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17492 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17493 Update (Other Formats)
17498 \begin_layout Standard
17499 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17502 To have a real output, export your document.
17505 \begin_layout Section
17506 A few Words about Typography
17507 \begin_inset Index idx
17510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17519 \begin_layout Subsection
17520 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17521 \begin_inset Index idx
17524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17531 \begin_inset Index idx
17534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17543 \begin_layout Standard
17544 In \SpecialChar LyX
17546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17557 symbol comes in four variants: the
17574 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17580 \begin_layout Standard
17581 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17591 height_special "totalheight"
17596 backgroundcolor "none"
17599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17600 \begin_inset Tabular
17601 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17602 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17603 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17604 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17605 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17606 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17607 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17635 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17636 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17675 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17676 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17698 system key combination
17702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17703 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17715 and the em dash with
17718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17731 is the Mac label for the right
17742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17755 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17756 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17778 system key combination or
17779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17793 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17806 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17845 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17851 \begin_layout Standard
17852 Dashes can also be inserted with
17854 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17856 \begin_inset space ~
17859 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17867 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17868 and 2014 for the en dash).
17871 \begin_layout Standard
17872 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17873 mode and has a length of its own.
17874 Here are some examples:
17877 \begin_layout Enumerate
17878 line- and page-breaks
17879 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17889 \begin_layout Enumerate
17891 \begin_inset space ~
17895 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17905 \begin_layout Enumerate
17906 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17907 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17917 \begin_layout Enumerate
17918 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17922 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17932 \begin_layout Standard
17934 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17936 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17937 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17945 \begin_layout Subsection
17946 Dashes and Line Breaks
17947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17949 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17956 \begin_layout Standard
17957 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17958 case and locale, e.
17959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17965 \begin_layout Itemize
17966 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17967 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17970 \begin_layout Itemize
17971 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17975 \begin_layout Itemize
17976 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17977 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17980 \begin_layout Standard
17981 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17982 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17993 allows line breaks after hyphens
17994 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
17996 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
17999 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18002 \begin_layout Enumerate
18003 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18004 \begin_inset space ~
18007 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18009 The Elements of Typographic Style
18012 \begin_inset space ~
18015 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18018 \begin_layout Enumerate
18019 Unwanted line breaks
18024 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18026 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18029 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18036 Prevent Hyphenation
18041 \begin_inset space ~
18057 in \SpecialChar TeX
18059 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18060 , a protected space does not suffice
18064 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18071 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18072 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18073 in the document language.
18074 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18088 \begin_layout Itemize
18090 \begin_inset space ~
18094 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18104 height_special "totalheight"
18109 backgroundcolor "none"
18112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18121 \begin_layout Itemize
18123 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18133 height_special "totalheight"
18138 backgroundcolor "none"
18141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18143 \begin_inset space ~
18151 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18152 \begin_inset space ~
18155 – sont très utiles.
18158 \begin_layout Itemize
18163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18172 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18176 \begin_layout Standard
18177 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18178 \begin_inset space ~
18181 – in contrast to an overfull line
18182 \begin_inset space ~
18185 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18189 \begin_layout Standard
18190 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18193 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18194 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18195 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18196 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18201 \begin_layout Enumerate
18202 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18203 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18204 or \SpecialChar TeX
18210 \begin_layout Itemize
18212 \begin_inset space ~
18215 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18216 \begin_inset space ~
18219 – sont très utiles.
18223 \begin_layout Enumerate
18224 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18225 \begin_inset Newline newline
18230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18231 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18232 Optional line break
18238 \begin_layout Itemize
18239 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18240 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18241 should be followed by
18242 a line break opportunity.
18245 \begin_layout Standard
18246 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18247 \begin_inset space ~
18251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18253 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18264 \begin_layout Enumerate
18265 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18266 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18267 or en dashes (see section
18268 \begin_inset space ~
18272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18274 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18284 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18285 Changes and backwards compatibility
18288 \begin_layout Standard
18289 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18291 \begin_inset space ~
18294 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18295 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18304 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18305 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18313 \begin_layout Standard
18314 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18316 \begin_inset space ~
18319 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18321 prevents ligation to dashes.
18323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18330 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18335 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18336 after the input (unless the current text font is
18344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18345 The behavior was changed since
18346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18361 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18362 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18363 as non-breakable dashes.
18364 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18373 \begin_layout Standard
18376 \begin_inset space ~
18384 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18386 \begin_inset space ~
18389 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18392 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18393 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18394 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18395 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18397 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18401 If you used both literal and
18402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18409 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18411 \begin_inset space ~
18414 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18415 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18418 \begin_layout Subsection
18420 \begin_inset Index idx
18423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18432 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18439 \begin_layout Standard
18440 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18441 but automatically in the output.
18442 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18448 \begin_inset Index idx
18451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18458 following the rules of the document language.
18460 does not hyphenate text in the
18464 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18467 \begin_layout Standard
18469 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18473 font and with unusual constructs, like
18474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18482 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18483 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18484 This is done with the menu
18486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18487 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18489 \begin_inset space ~
18495 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18497 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18501 \begin_layout Standard
18502 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18503 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18514 would then see the hyphen
18515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18522 as a line break possibility.
18523 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18524 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18527 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18528 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18531 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18533 Prevent Hyphenation
18538 \begin_inset space ~
18546 \begin_layout Subsection
18548 \begin_inset Index idx
18551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18561 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18564 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18571 \begin_layout Standard
18572 When \SpecialChar LyX
18573 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18574 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18576 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18582 appropriate amount of space.
18583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18586 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18588 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18589 gets after another word.
18592 \begin_layout Standard
18593 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18594 not work in all cases.
18596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18607 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18608 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18611 \begin_layout Standard
18612 Here are some examples of
18616 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18619 \begin_layout Itemize
18624 \begin_layout Itemize
18629 \begin_layout Standard
18630 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18633 \begin_layout Itemize
18635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18639 this is too much space!
18642 \begin_layout Itemize
18647 \begin_layout Standard
18648 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18651 \begin_layout Standard
18652 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18655 \begin_layout Enumerate
18659 \begin_inset space ~
18664 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18665 \begin_inset space ~
18669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18671 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18676 \begin_inset Index idx
18679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18680 Spaces ! inter-word
18688 \begin_layout Enumerate
18692 \begin_inset space ~
18697 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18698 \begin_inset space ~
18702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18704 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18709 \begin_inset Index idx
18712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18721 \begin_layout Enumerate
18725 \begin_inset space ~
18729 \begin_inset space ~
18733 \begin_inset space ~
18740 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18742 \begin_inset space ~
18747 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18748 This function is also bound to
18751 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18757 \begin_layout Standard
18758 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18761 \begin_layout Itemize
18763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18767 \begin_inset space \space{}
18770 this is too much space!
18773 \begin_layout Itemize
18774 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18778 \begin_layout Standard
18779 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18780 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18782 will take care of this.
18785 \begin_layout Standard
18786 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18790 \begin_inset space ~
18796 feature described in the section
18798 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18803 Additional Features
18808 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18810 \begin_inset Index idx
18813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18814 Typography ! Quotation marks
18820 \begin_inset Index idx
18823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18824 Quotation marks | see
18828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18854 \begin_layout Standard
18856 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18857 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18858 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18868 The keyboard character,
18872 , generates this automatically.
18875 \begin_layout Standard
18876 You can specify what character the
18880 key produces by using the submenu
18886 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18890 \begin_inset Index idx
18893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18894 Document ! Settings
18899 dialog and switching the
18903 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18904 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18906 \begin_inset space ~
18912 \begin_layout Labeling
18913 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18925 \begin_inset space ~
18929 \begin_inset space ~
18933 \begin_inset Quotes els
18937 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18951 \begin_inset Quotes els
18955 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18958 quotation marks (as common, e.
18959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18965 \begin_layout Labeling
18966 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18969 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18973 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18977 \begin_inset space ~
18981 \begin_inset space ~
18985 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18989 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18995 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18999 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19003 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19007 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19010 quotation marks (as common, e.
19011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19017 \begin_layout Labeling
19018 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19021 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19025 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19029 \begin_inset space ~
19033 \begin_inset space ~
19037 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19041 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19047 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19051 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19055 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19059 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19062 quotation marks (as common, e.
19063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19069 \begin_layout Labeling
19070 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19073 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19077 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19081 \begin_inset space ~
19085 \begin_inset space ~
19089 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19093 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19099 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19103 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19107 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19111 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19114 quotation marks (as common, e.
19115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19121 \begin_layout Labeling
19122 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19125 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19129 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19133 \begin_inset space ~
19137 \begin_inset space ~
19141 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19145 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19151 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19155 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19159 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19163 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19166 quotation marks (as common, e.
19167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19170 g., in Switzerland)
19173 \begin_layout Labeling
19174 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19177 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19181 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19185 \begin_inset space ~
19189 \begin_inset space ~
19193 \begin_inset Quotes als
19197 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19203 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19207 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19211 \begin_inset Quotes als
19215 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19218 quotation marks (as common, e.
19219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19225 \begin_layout Labeling
19226 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19229 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19233 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19237 \begin_inset space ~
19241 \begin_inset space ~
19245 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19249 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19255 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19259 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19263 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19267 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19270 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19273 \begin_layout Labeling
19274 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19277 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19281 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19285 \begin_inset space ~
19289 \begin_inset space ~
19293 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19297 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19303 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19307 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19311 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19315 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19318 quotation marks (as common, e.
19319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19322 g., in Great Britain)
19325 \begin_layout Labeling
19326 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19329 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19333 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19337 \begin_inset space ~
19341 \begin_inset space ~
19345 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19349 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19355 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19359 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19363 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19367 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19370 quotation marks (as common, e.
19371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19377 \begin_layout Labeling
19378 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19381 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19385 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19389 \begin_inset space ~
19393 \begin_inset space ~
19397 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19401 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19407 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19411 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19415 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19419 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19422 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19427 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19428 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19429 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19430 the inner marks differ).
19438 \begin_layout Labeling
19439 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19442 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19446 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19450 \begin_inset space ~
19454 \begin_inset space ~
19458 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19462 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19468 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19472 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19476 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19480 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19483 quotation marks (as common, e.
19484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19490 \begin_layout Labeling
19491 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19494 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19498 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19502 \begin_inset space ~
19506 \begin_inset space ~
19510 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19514 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19520 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19524 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19528 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19532 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19535 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19538 \begin_layout Labeling
19539 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19540 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19548 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19554 \begin_inset space ~
19558 \begin_inset space ~
19564 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19572 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19576 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19580 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19584 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19588 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19591 quotation marks (as common, e.
19592 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19600 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19601 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19609 \begin_layout Labeling
19610 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19611 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19619 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19625 \begin_inset space ~
19629 \begin_inset space ~
19635 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19643 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19647 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19651 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19655 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19659 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19662 quotation marks (as common, e.
19663 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19666 g., in North Korea and China)
19670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19671 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19672 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19680 \begin_layout Standard
19681 Inner quotation marks
19685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19686 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19687 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19688 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19696 does not necessarily mean
19697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19705 This is why we call them
19706 \begin_inset Quotes els
19710 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19726 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19728 \begin_inset Quotes els
19732 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19735 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19738 arg "quote-insert inner"
19743 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19749 \begin_layout Standard
19750 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19751 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19752 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19753 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19754 If you check the setting
19756 Use dynamic quotation marks
19760 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19761 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19764 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19765 they appear in a special color).
19766 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19767 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19772 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19775 \begin_layout Standard
19776 Individual quotation marks (i.
19777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19780 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19781 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19785 \begin_layout Subsection
19787 \begin_inset Index idx
19790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19791 Typography ! Ligatures
19797 \begin_inset Index idx
19800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19831 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19838 \begin_layout Standard
19839 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19840 print them as single characters.
19841 These groups are known as
19846 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19847 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19849 Here are the standard ligatures:
19852 \begin_layout Itemize
19856 \begin_layout Itemize
19860 \begin_layout Itemize
19864 \begin_layout Itemize
19868 \begin_layout Itemize
19872 \begin_layout Standard
19873 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19876 \begin_layout Standard
19877 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19878 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19886 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19902 To break a ligature, use
19904 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19905 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19907 \begin_inset space ~
19914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19925 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19942 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19950 \begin_layout Subsection
19952 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19954 \begin_inset Index idx
19957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19967 \begin_layout Standard
19970 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19971 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19975 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19978 \begin_layout Description
19980 The name of the game.
19983 \begin_layout Description
19985 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19989 \begin_layout Description
19991 The \SpecialChar TeX
19992 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19996 \begin_layout Description
19997 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19998 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20002 \begin_layout Standard
20003 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20009 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20017 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20018 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20019 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20020 converges to the number
20021 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20024 : The actual version is
20025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20033 , the previous one was
20034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20045 \begin_layout Subsection
20047 \begin_inset Index idx
20050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20059 \begin_layout Standard
20060 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20061 space between two words.
20062 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20072 for units use the menu
20074 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20075 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20077 \begin_inset space ~
20085 arg "space-insert thin"
20091 \begin_layout Standard
20092 Here is an example to show the differences:
20095 \begin_layout Standard
20096 \begin_inset Tabular
20097 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20098 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20099 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20100 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20107 \begin_inset space ~
20111 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20123 space between number and unit
20130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20135 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20139 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20151 half space between number and unit
20164 \begin_layout Subsection
20166 \begin_inset Index idx
20169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20170 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20178 \begin_layout Standard
20179 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20181 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20182 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20183 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20184 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20185 These bits of text became known as
20196 \begin_layout Standard
20197 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20198 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20199 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20200 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20201 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20202 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20203 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20204 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20205 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20206 \begin_inset Newline newline
20214 \begin_inset Newline newline
20222 \begin_inset Newline newline
20225 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20226 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20227 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20229 \begin_inset space ~
20233 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20235 key "latexcompanion"
20241 \begin_inset space ~
20245 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20252 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20253 's page break mechanism.
20256 \begin_layout Chapter
20257 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20260 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20267 \begin_layout Standard
20268 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20271 \begin_inset space ~
20277 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20280 \begin_layout Section
20282 \begin_inset Index idx
20285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20301 \begin_layout Standard
20303 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20306 \begin_layout Description
20309 \begin_inset space ~
20312 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20313 \begin_inset Newline newline
20317 \begin_inset Note Note
20320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20321 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20329 \begin_layout Description
20330 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20331 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20332 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20335 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20336 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20338 \begin_inset space ~
20344 \begin_inset Newline newline
20348 \begin_inset Note Comment
20351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20352 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20361 \begin_layout Description
20363 \begin_inset space ~
20366 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20367 set in the document settings under
20369 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20371 \begin_inset space ~
20377 \begin_inset Newline newline
20381 \begin_inset Newline newline
20385 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20394 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20395 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20400 of a comment that appears in the output.
20406 \begin_inset Newline newline
20410 \begin_inset Newline newline
20413 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20416 \begin_layout Standard
20417 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20425 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20429 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20432 \begin_layout Section
20434 \begin_inset Index idx
20437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20446 name "sec:Footnotes"
20453 \begin_layout Standard
20455 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20461 or the toolbar button
20464 arg "footnote-insert"
20476 \begin_inset Graphics
20477 filename clipart/footnote.png
20486 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20487 's representation of your footnote.
20497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20516 label, the box will
20520 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20521 Clicking on the box label again will close
20534 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20535 and click on the footnote
20550 \begin_layout Standard
20551 Here is an example footnote:
20559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20560 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20568 \begin_layout Standard
20569 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20570 position where the footnote box is placed.
20571 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20572 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20573 according to the document class.
20575 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20576 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20582 ey are described in the
20585 \begin_inset space ~
20593 \begin_layout Section
20595 \begin_inset Index idx
20598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20607 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20614 \begin_layout Standard
20615 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20617 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20619 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20621 \begin_inset space ~
20626 or the toolbar button
20629 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20655 appearing within your text.
20656 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20657 's representation of your margin
20666 \begin_layout Standard
20667 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20671 \begin_inset Marginal
20674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20676 This is a marginal note.
20684 \begin_layout Standard
20685 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20686 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20687 pages, right on odd pages.
20690 \begin_layout Standard
20691 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20694 \begin_inset space ~
20702 \begin_inset space ~
20710 \begin_layout Section
20711 Graphics and Images
20712 \begin_inset Index idx
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20722 \begin_inset Index idx
20725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20734 name "sec:Graphics"
20741 \begin_layout Standard
20742 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20743 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20746 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20751 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20755 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20758 \begin_layout Standard
20759 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20764 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20765 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20767 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20768 \begin_inset space ~
20772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20774 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20781 \begin_layout Standard
20786 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20787 of the image in the output.
20788 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20792 \begin_inset space ~
20796 \begin_inset space ~
20805 \begin_inset space ~
20809 \begin_inset space ~
20813 \begin_inset space ~
20818 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20819 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20827 \begin_layout Standard
20831 \begin_inset space ~
20835 \begin_inset space ~
20840 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20841 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20843 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20848 \begin_inset space ~
20853 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20854 with the image size is printed.
20857 \begin_layout Standard
20858 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20859 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20861 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20864 \begin_layout Standard
20866 \begin_inset Graphics
20867 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20875 \begin_layout Standard
20876 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20877 the image into a float, see section
20878 \begin_inset space ~
20882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20884 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20891 \begin_layout Subsection
20893 \begin_inset Index idx
20896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20903 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20905 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20912 \begin_layout Standard
20913 You can insert images in any known file format.
20914 But as we explained in section
20915 \begin_inset space ~
20919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20921 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20925 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20927 therefore uses the program
20931 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20932 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20933 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20934 \begin_inset space ~
20938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20940 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20947 \begin_layout Standard
20948 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20951 \begin_layout Description
20953 \begin_inset space ~
20956 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20957 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20958 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20962 Graphics Interchange Format
20963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20966 (GIF, file extension
20967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20979 \begin_inset Index idx
20982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21014 Portable Network Graphics
21015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21018 (PNG, file extension
21019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21031 \begin_inset Index idx
21034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21066 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21070 (JPG, file extension
21071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21095 \begin_inset Index idx
21098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21129 \begin_layout Description
21131 \begin_inset space ~
21134 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21136 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21137 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21138 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21139 \begin_inset Newline newline
21142 Scalable image formats can be
21143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21146 Scalable Vector Graphics
21147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21150 (SVG, file extension
21151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21163 \begin_inset Index idx
21166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21198 Encapsulated PostScript
21199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21202 (EPS, file extension
21203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21215 \begin_inset Index idx
21218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21250 Portable Document Format
21251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21254 (PDF, file extension
21255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21267 \begin_inset Index idx
21270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21285 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21286 result will not be scalable.
21287 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21301 \begin_layout Standard
21302 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21309 \begin_layout Subsection
21310 Grouping of Image Settings
21311 \begin_inset Index idx
21314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21315 Images ! Settings grouping
21323 \begin_layout Standard
21324 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21326 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21327 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21329 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21330 need to manually change each of them.
21334 \begin_layout Standard
21335 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21338 \begin_inset space ~
21342 \begin_inset space ~
21354 \begin_inset space ~
21358 \begin_inset space ~
21364 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21365 and checking the name of the desired group.
21368 \begin_layout Section
21370 \begin_inset Index idx
21373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21389 \begin_layout Standard
21390 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21393 arg "tabular-insert"
21398 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21402 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21403 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21404 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21407 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21408 from the rest of the table.
21409 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21410 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21412 Here is an example table:
21415 \begin_layout Standard
21417 \begin_inset Tabular
21418 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21419 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21420 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21421 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21422 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21423 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21621 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21625 \begin_layout Standard
21627 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21628 This corresponds to the
21629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21636 table style listed in the style selection.
21639 \begin_layout Standard
21641 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21642 Other available styles include:
21645 \begin_layout Itemize
21647 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21656 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21660 \begin_layout Itemize
21662 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21663 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21666 \begin_layout Itemize
21668 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21677 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21678 bold top/bottom lines (see
21689 \begin_layout Standard
21691 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21692 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21693 button can be changed in
21695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21696 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21700 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21704 \begin_layout Subsection
21708 \begin_layout Standard
21709 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21712 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21716 This brings up the table dialog.
21717 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21718 cursor is placed currently.
21719 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21720 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21721 done on all of your selection.
21724 \begin_layout Standard
21725 In addition to the table dialog, the
21728 \begin_inset space ~
21733 helps you in setting table properties.
21734 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21737 \begin_layout Standard
21741 \begin_inset space ~
21746 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21747 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21748 current cell respectively.
21749 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21751 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21752 of text, see section
21753 \begin_inset space ~
21757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21759 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21766 \begin_layout Standard
21767 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21768 using the check box
21777 This will merge the cells to
21781 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21782 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21783 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21784 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21785 in the last row without the upper border:
21788 \begin_layout Standard
21790 \begin_inset Tabular
21791 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21792 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21793 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21794 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21795 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21796 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21807 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21816 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21892 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21927 \begin_layout Standard
21928 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21929 -arguments for the table.
21930 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21931 explained in the chapter
21938 \begin_inset space ~
21944 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21945 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21946 but are visible in the output.
21949 \begin_layout Standard
21950 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21958 Most DVI-viewers are
21962 able to display rotations.
21970 \begin_layout Standard
21975 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21980 adds lines for all cell borders.
21983 \begin_layout Subsection
21985 \begin_inset Index idx
21988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21989 Tables ! Multi-page
21995 \begin_inset Index idx
21998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22007 \begin_layout Standard
22008 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22011 \begin_inset space ~
22015 \begin_inset space ~
22023 \begin_inset space ~
22028 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22029 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22032 \begin_layout Description
22037 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22038 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22039 Except for the first page, if
22042 \begin_inset space ~
22050 \begin_layout Description
22054 \begin_inset space ~
22059 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22060 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22063 \begin_layout Description
22068 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22069 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22070 except for the last page, if
22073 \begin_inset space ~
22081 \begin_layout Description
22085 \begin_inset space ~
22090 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22091 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22094 \begin_layout Description
22095 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22096 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22098 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22102 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22105 \begin_inset space ~
22113 \begin_layout Standard
22114 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22115 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22116 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22122 In this context, first means first in this order:
22125 \begin_inset space ~
22137 \begin_inset space ~
22142 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22145 \begin_layout Standard
22147 \begin_inset Tabular
22148 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22149 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22150 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22151 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22152 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22153 <row endfirsthead="true">
22154 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22160 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22165 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22174 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22184 <row endfirsthead="true">
22185 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22196 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22205 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22217 <row endhead="true">
22218 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22238 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22248 <row endhead="true">
22249 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22269 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22281 <row endfoot="true">
22282 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22293 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22302 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23274 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23283 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23292 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23303 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23334 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23365 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23396 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23427 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23458 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23489 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23520 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23551 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23582 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23613 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23644 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23675 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23706 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23737 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23768 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23799 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23830 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23861 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23892 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23923 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23954 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23985 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24016 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24047 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24078 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24109 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24140 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24171 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24202 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24233 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24263 <row endlastfoot="true">
24264 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24275 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24284 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24301 \begin_layout Subsection
24303 \begin_inset Index idx
24306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24315 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24322 \begin_layout Standard
24323 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24324 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24325 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24326 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24330 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24333 \begin_layout Standard
24334 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24335 for the column in the table dialog.
24336 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24337 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24341 \begin_layout Standard
24343 \begin_inset Tabular
24344 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24345 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24346 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24347 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24348 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24368 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24437 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24493 This is longer now.
24498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24549 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24550 This is longer now.
24555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24581 \begin_layout Standard
24582 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24583 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24588 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24589 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24595 Selection with the mouse or with
24599 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24600 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24601 the selection from outside the table.
24604 \begin_layout Section
24606 \begin_inset Index idx
24609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24616 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24625 \begin_layout Subsection
24629 \begin_layout Standard
24630 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24631 have a fixed location.
24633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24640 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24648 \begin_inset space ~
24653 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24654 too many notes on the current page.
24657 \begin_layout Standard
24658 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24659 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24660 and pages without text.
24661 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24662 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24663 Floats are therefore numbered.
24664 Referencing is described in section
24665 \begin_inset space ~
24669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24671 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24678 \begin_layout Standard
24679 To insert a float, use the menu
24681 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24685 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24686 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24688 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24689 \begin_inset Index idx
24692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24698 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24699 paragraph within the float.
24700 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24701 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24702 left-clicking on the box label.
24703 A closed float box looks like this:
24704 \begin_inset Graphics
24705 filename clipart/float.png
24710 – a gray button with a red label.
24713 \begin_layout Standard
24714 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24716 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24719 \begin_layout Subsection
24721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24723 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24728 \begin_inset Index idx
24731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24732 Floats ! Figure floats
24740 \begin_layout Standard
24742 \begin_inset space ~
24746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24748 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24752 was created using the menu
24754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24755 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24761 arg "float-insert figure"
24765 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24768 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24774 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24778 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24779 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24781 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24783 \begin_inset space ~
24791 arg "layout-paragraph"
24797 \begin_layout Standard
24798 \begin_inset Float figure
24805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24807 \begin_inset Graphics
24808 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24818 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24823 name "fig:A-star-in"
24840 \begin_layout Standard
24841 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24842 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24853 ) and refer to it using the menu
24855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24861 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24865 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24866 vague references like
24867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24874 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24875 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24885 For more about cross-references, see section
24886 \begin_inset space ~
24890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24892 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24899 \begin_layout Standard
24900 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24901 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24902 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24903 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24904 as described in section
24905 \begin_inset space ~
24909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24911 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24917 \begin_inset space ~
24921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24923 reference "fig:Two-images"
24927 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24928 You can also set the images one below the other.
24930 \begin_inset space ~
24934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24936 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24943 reference "fig:Star"
24947 are the subfigures.
24950 \begin_layout Standard
24951 \begin_inset Float figure
24958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24959 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24963 \begin_inset Float figure
24970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24971 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24974 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24976 name "fig:Undefinable"
24988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24989 \begin_inset Graphics
24990 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25002 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25006 \begin_inset Float figure
25013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25014 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25032 \begin_inset Graphics
25033 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25045 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25052 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25057 name "fig:Two-images"
25074 \begin_layout Subsection
25076 \begin_inset Index idx
25079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25080 Floats ! Table floats
25088 \begin_layout Standard
25089 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25092 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25095 or the toolbar button
25098 arg "float-insert table"
25102 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25103 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25104 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25106 \begin_inset space ~
25110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25112 reference "tab:Table-float"
25119 \begin_layout Standard
25120 \begin_inset Float table
25127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25128 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25133 name "tab:Table-float"
25145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25147 \begin_inset Tabular
25148 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25149 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25150 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25151 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25152 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25279 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25300 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25303 \end{array}\right]$
25311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25324 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25345 \begin_layout Subsection
25347 \begin_inset Index idx
25350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25359 \begin_layout Standard
25361 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25362 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25363 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25365 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25373 \begin_inset space ~
25381 \begin_layout Section
25383 \begin_inset Index idx
25386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25395 \begin_layout Standard
25397 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25399 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25400 \begin_inset space \space{}
25407 \begin_layout Standard
25408 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25409 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25411 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25415 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25416 and its alignment within the page.
25419 \begin_layout Standard
25421 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25431 height_special "totalheight"
25436 backgroundcolor "none"
25439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25442 This is a minipage.
25443 The text is set in an italic style.
25446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25449 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25450 another formatting.
25458 \begin_layout Standard
25459 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25462 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25466 as described in section
25467 \begin_inset space ~
25471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25473 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25478 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25484 \begin_layout Standard
25485 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25495 height_special "totalheight"
25500 backgroundcolor "none"
25503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25504 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25505 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25511 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25515 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25525 height_special "totalheight"
25530 backgroundcolor "none"
25533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25534 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25535 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25543 \begin_layout Standard
25544 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25550 \begin_layout Standard
25551 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25553 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25560 \begin_inset space ~
25568 \begin_layout Chapter
25569 Mathematical Formulas
25570 \begin_inset Index idx
25573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25580 \begin_inset Index idx
25583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25614 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25621 \begin_layout Standard
25622 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25627 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25630 \begin_layout Section
25632 \begin_inset Index idx
25635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25644 \begin_layout Standard
25645 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25658 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25660 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25661 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25662 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25664 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25670 \begin_layout Standard
25671 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25675 \begin_inset space ~
25680 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25683 \begin_layout Standard
25684 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25685 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25688 \begin_layout Standard
25689 This is a line with an inline formula
25690 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25696 \begin_layout Standard
25697 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25698 paragraph, like this one:
25699 \begin_inset Formula
25706 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25709 \begin_layout Standard
25711 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25713 For example, typing
25714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25727 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25728 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25732 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25735 \begin_inset space ~
25743 \begin_layout Subsection
25744 Navigating in Formulas
25745 \begin_inset Index idx
25748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25757 \begin_layout Standard
25758 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25759 achieved with the arrow keys.
25761 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25762 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25767 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25768 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25772 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25776 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25779 \end{array}\right]$
25787 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25792 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25793 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25796 \begin_layout Standard
25801 , printed in this document as
25802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25806 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25813 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25814 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25815 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25820 For example, if you want
25821 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25829 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25839 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25843 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25848 , since in the latter case only the
25851 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25856 will be under the square root sign:
25857 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25863 \begin_layout Standard
25864 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25866 \begin_inset Formula
25868 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25877 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25878 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25881 \begin_layout Subsection
25885 \begin_layout Standard
25886 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25887 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25891 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25892 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25893 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25894 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25895 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25899 \begin_layout Subsection
25900 Exponents and Subscripts
25901 \begin_inset Index idx
25904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25911 \begin_inset Index idx
25914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25923 \begin_layout Standard
25924 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25927 arg "math-superscript"
25933 arg "math-subscript"
25936 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25938 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25941 , type in a formula
25944 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25954 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25960 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25964 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25970 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25976 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25985 , you have to use an extra
25989 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25990 For example, if you want
25991 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25997 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26003 Subscripts are similar: To get
26004 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26010 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26018 \begin_layout Subsection
26020 \begin_inset Index idx
26023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26032 \begin_layout Standard
26033 Create a fraction either with the command
26039 or by using the icon
26042 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26048 \begin_inset space ~
26054 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26055 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26056 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26061 To move back up, press
26066 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26067 \begin_inset Formula
26069 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26072 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26080 \begin_layout Subsection
26082 \begin_inset Index idx
26085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26094 \begin_layout Standard
26095 Roots can be created using the
26098 \begin_inset space ~
26106 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26112 arg "math-insert \\root"
26134 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26140 always produces a square root.
26143 \begin_layout Subsection
26144 Operators with Limits
26145 \begin_inset Index idx
26148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26155 \begin_inset Index idx
26158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26167 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26174 \begin_layout Standard
26176 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26180 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26183 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26184 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26185 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26186 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26187 The sum operator will automatically place its
26188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26195 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26197 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26201 \begin_inset Formula
26203 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26208 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26212 \begin_layout Standard
26213 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26215 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26216 behind the operator and using the menu
26218 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26219 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26221 \begin_inset space ~
26225 \begin_inset space ~
26239 \begin_layout Standard
26240 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26249 \begin_inset Index idx
26252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26259 \begin_inset Formula
26261 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26266 which will place the
26267 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26279 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26280 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26286 \begin_layout Standard
26287 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26294 Have a look at section
26295 \begin_inset space ~
26299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26301 reference "subsec:Functions"
26305 for an explanation of function macros.
26308 \begin_layout Subsection
26310 \begin_inset Index idx
26313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26322 \begin_layout Standard
26323 Most math symbols can be found in the
26326 \begin_inset space ~
26331 under one of several categories; including
26348 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26352 \begin_layout Standard
26353 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26354 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26355 don't have to use the
26358 \begin_inset space ~
26363 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26365 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26368 \begin_layout Subsection
26370 \begin_inset Index idx
26373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26382 \begin_layout Standard
26383 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26389 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26395 \begin_inset space ~
26403 arg "math-insert \\space"
26407 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26408 For example, the sequence
26413 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26416 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26418 \begin_inset Graphics
26419 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26424 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26425 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26426 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26427 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26428 , because they are negative
26430 Here are two examples:
26433 \begin_layout Standard
26443 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26449 \begin_layout Standard
26459 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26465 \begin_layout Subsection
26467 \begin_inset Index idx
26470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26479 name "subsec:Functions"
26486 \begin_layout Standard
26490 \begin_inset space ~
26495 contains under the button
26498 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26501 a number of function macros, such as
26502 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26506 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26514 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26521 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26522 avoid confusions, because
26523 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26527 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26533 \begin_layout Standard
26534 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26536 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26540 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26546 \begin_layout Standard
26547 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26548 are placed, as described in section
26549 \begin_inset space ~
26553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26555 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26562 \begin_layout Subsection
26564 \begin_inset Index idx
26567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26576 \begin_layout Standard
26577 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26579 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26580 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26581 commands, for example, to enter
26582 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26585 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26586 Our example is entered by typing
26591 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26598 \begin_inset space ~
26602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26604 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26608 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26611 \begin_layout Standard
26612 \begin_inset Float table
26619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26620 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26625 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26629 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26639 \begin_inset Tabular
26640 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26641 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26642 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26643 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26644 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26728 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26782 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26836 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26890 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26944 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26998 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27052 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27106 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27160 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27205 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27226 \begin_layout Standard
27227 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27230 \begin_inset space ~
27238 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27241 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27245 \begin_layout Section
27246 Brackets and Delimiters
27247 \begin_inset Index idx
27250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27257 \begin_inset Index idx
27260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27269 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27276 \begin_layout Standard
27277 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27279 For some purposes, using just the keys
27284 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27285 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27286 toolbar delimiter icon
27289 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27293 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27294 \begin_inset Formula
27296 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27304 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27305 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27309 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27312 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27318 \begin_inset Formula
27320 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27328 \begin_layout Standard
27329 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27330 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27334 \begin_layout Standard
27335 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27336 left side and right side.
27337 If you use the option
27340 \begin_inset space ~
27345 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27346 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27348 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27353 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27354 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27357 \begin_layout Standard
27358 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27359 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27360 is to go inside the brackets.
27361 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27366 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27367 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27368 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27372 arg "math-delim ( )"
27378 \begin_layout Section
27379 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27380 \begin_inset Index idx
27383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27390 \begin_inset Index idx
27393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27400 \begin_inset Index idx
27403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27404 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27412 \begin_layout Standard
27413 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27417 \begin_inset space ~
27425 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27429 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27430 Here is an example:
27431 \begin_inset Formula
27433 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27442 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27443 \begin_inset space ~
27447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27449 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27454 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27455 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27456 This alignment is set in the box
27461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27510 for every column as default.
27511 For example, the sequence
27512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27523 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27524 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27525 corresponds to the relevant column.
27526 The result will look like this:
27527 \begin_inset Formula
27530 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27531 column & has & has\,right\\
27532 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27541 \begin_layout Standard
27542 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27545 arg "newline-insert newline"
27548 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27549 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27551 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27554 or the math toolbar.
27557 \begin_layout Standard
27558 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27559 It can be created with the menu
27561 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27562 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27564 \begin_inset space ~
27576 Here is an example:
27577 \begin_inset Formula
27591 \begin_layout Standard
27592 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27595 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27598 arg "newline-insert newline"
27602 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27607 arg "newline-insert newline"
27610 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27618 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27619 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27620 A new row is created by every further entry of
27623 arg "newline-insert newline"
27627 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27628 Here is an example:
27629 \begin_inset Formula
27631 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27632 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27637 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27638 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27639 \begin_inset Formula
27641 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27649 \begin_layout Standard
27650 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27657 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27658 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27661 reference "eq:asquared"
27666 The other types are described in section
27667 \begin_inset space ~
27671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27673 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27680 \begin_layout Section
27681 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27682 \begin_inset Index idx
27685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27686 Math ! Formula numbering
27692 \begin_inset Index idx
27695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27696 Math ! Referencing formulas
27702 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27704 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27711 \begin_layout Standard
27712 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27714 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27715 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27717 \begin_inset space ~
27721 \begin_inset space ~
27729 arg "math-number-toggle"
27733 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27734 within parentheses.
27735 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27736 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27737 the document class.
27738 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27739 separated by a dot:
27740 \begin_inset Formula
27750 arg "math-number-toggle"
27753 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27754 You can only number displayed formulas.
27757 \begin_layout Standard
27758 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27760 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27761 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27763 \begin_inset space ~
27767 \begin_inset space ~
27775 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27778 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27779 \begin_inset Formula
27782 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27788 To number all lines use the shortcut
27791 arg "math-number-toggle"
27797 \begin_layout Standard
27798 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27801 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27802 A label is inserted with the menu
27804 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27813 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27814 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27815 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27827 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27828 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27829 We inserted in the following example the label
27830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27837 in the second line:
27838 \begin_inset Formula
27840 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27841 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27846 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27847 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27848 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27850 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27852 \begin_inset space ~
27860 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27864 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27865 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27866 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27867 as the formula number:
27870 \begin_layout Standard
27871 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27874 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27881 \begin_layout Standard
27882 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27883 's cross-reference box are described in section
27884 \begin_inset space ~
27888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27890 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27895 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27903 \begin_layout Section
27904 User defined math macros
27905 \begin_inset Index idx
27908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27917 \begin_layout Standard
27919 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27920 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27921 Math macros are explained in section
27924 \begin_inset space ~
27936 \begin_layout Section
27940 \begin_layout Subsection
27942 \begin_inset Index idx
27945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27954 \begin_layout Standard
27955 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27956 To set a font in a formula, use the
27959 \begin_inset space ~
27967 arg "math-insert \\font"
27970 , or enter its command, listed in table
27971 \begin_inset space ~
27975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27977 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27984 \begin_layout Standard
27985 \begin_inset Float table
27992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27993 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27998 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28002 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28012 \begin_inset Tabular
28013 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
28014 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28015 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28016 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28048 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28075 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28102 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28135 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28162 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28189 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28223 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28250 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28284 \begin_layout Standard
28285 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28293 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28309 \begin_layout Standard
28310 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28311 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28316 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28317 space when you need a space in the box.
28318 Here is an example where
28319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28330 denotes the set of numbers:
28331 \begin_inset Formula
28333 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28341 \begin_layout Standard
28342 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28343 You can, for example, put a character in
28352 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28356 \begin_inset Newline newline
28359 So it is better not to use this feature.
28362 \begin_layout Standard
28363 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28364 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28368 \begin_inset Newline newline
28371 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28377 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28378 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28384 \begin_layout Standard
28391 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28394 \begin_layout Standard
28395 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28397 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28398 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28400 \begin_inset space ~
28408 \begin_layout Subsection
28410 \begin_inset Index idx
28413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28422 \begin_layout Standard
28423 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28425 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28429 \begin_inset space ~
28433 \begin_inset space ~
28441 \begin_inset space ~
28449 arg "math-insert \\font"
28453 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28454 in black instead of blue.
28455 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28456 Here is an example:
28457 \begin_inset Formula
28460 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28461 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28470 \begin_layout Subsection
28472 \begin_inset Index idx
28475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28484 \begin_layout Standard
28485 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28486 automatically chosen in most situations.
28504 For most characters,
28512 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28513 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28518 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28519 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28520 thinks are appropriate.
28521 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28524 arg "math-insert \\style"
28528 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28529 For example, you can set
28530 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28533 , which is normally in
28542 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28546 The four styles are used in the following example:
28549 \begin_layout Standard
28550 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28554 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28558 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28562 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28568 \begin_layout Standard
28569 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28570 is set in a particular size with the menu
28572 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28574 \begin_inset space ~
28579 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28580 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28581 will be adjusted to correspond.
28582 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28593 \begin_layout Standard
28597 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28603 \begin_layout Section
28604 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28606 \begin_inset Index idx
28609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28616 \begin_inset Index idx
28619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28628 \begin_layout Standard
28630 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28631 that are in common use.
28634 \begin_layout Subsection
28635 Enabling AMS-Support
28638 \begin_layout Standard
28639 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28640 the document by selecting the checkbox
28643 \begin_inset space ~
28647 \begin_inset space ~
28651 \begin_inset space ~
28658 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28662 \begin_inset Index idx
28665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28666 Document ! Settings
28674 \begin_inset space ~
28680 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28681 -errors in formulas,
28682 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28685 \begin_layout Subsection
28687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28689 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28694 \begin_inset Index idx
28697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28698 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28706 \begin_layout Standard
28707 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28708 provides a selection of different formula types.
28710 allows you to choose between
28731 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28732 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28739 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28742 \begin_layout Chapter
28746 \begin_layout Section
28748 \begin_inset Index idx
28751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28760 name "sec:Cross-References"
28767 \begin_layout Standard
28768 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28769 's strengths is cross-references.
28770 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28772 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28773 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28774 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28777 \begin_layout Enumerate
28781 \begin_layout Enumerate
28782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28784 name "enu:Second-item"
28791 \begin_layout Enumerate
28795 \begin_layout Standard
28796 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28798 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28801 or by pressing the toolbar button
28808 A gray label box like this:
28809 \begin_inset Graphics
28810 filename clipart/label.png
28814 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28816 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28851 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28852 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28868 \begin_layout Standard
28869 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28871 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28874 or the toolbar button
28877 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28881 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28882 \begin_inset Graphics
28883 filename clipart/reference.png
28887 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28889 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28902 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28906 \begin_layout Standard
28907 As an alternative to
28909 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28912 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28917 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28918 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28920 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28932 \begin_layout Standard
28933 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28934 \begin_inset space ~
28938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28940 reference "enu:Second-item"
28947 \begin_layout Standard
28948 It is recommended to use a protected space
28952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28953 described in section
28954 \begin_inset space ~
28958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28960 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28969 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28970 line breaks between them.
28973 \begin_layout Standard
28974 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28977 \begin_layout Description
28978 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28981 reference "fig:Two-images"
28988 \begin_layout Description
28989 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28990 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29002 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29009 \begin_layout Description
29010 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29011 \begin_inset space ~
29015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29016 LatexCommand pageref
29017 reference "fig:Two-images"
29024 \begin_layout Description
29026 \begin_inset space ~
29030 \begin_inset space ~
29033 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29035 LatexCommand vpageref
29036 reference "fig:Two-images"
29041 \begin_inset Newline newline
29044 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29045 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29046 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29047 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29048 it prints “on the next page”.
29049 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29052 \begin_layout Description
29054 \begin_inset space ~
29058 \begin_inset space ~
29062 \begin_inset space ~
29065 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29068 reference "fig:Two-images"
29073 \begin_inset Newline newline
29076 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29082 ; otherwise it behaves like
29086 \begin_inset space ~
29090 \begin_inset space ~
29099 \begin_layout Description
29101 \begin_inset space ~
29104 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29105 \begin_inset Newline newline
29109 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29117 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29127 \begin_inset Index idx
29130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29132 packages ! prettyref
29138 \begin_inset Index idx
29141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29143 packages ! refstyle
29154 \begin_inset Newline newline
29157 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29158 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29161 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29165 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29166 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29174 is the default and preferred because
29178 supports only English documents.
29179 The format is specified by using the command
29191 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29192 preamble of the document.
29193 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29211 \begin_inset Newline newline
29218 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29223 \begin_inset Newline newline
29234 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29235 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29237 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29238 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29243 , you might do so as follows:
29244 \begin_inset Newline newline
29251 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29256 \begin_inset Newline newline
29259 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29260 the package documentation
29261 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29263 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29269 \begin_inset Newline newline
29280 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29287 \begin_layout Description
29289 \begin_inset space ~
29292 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29294 LatexCommand nameref
29295 reference "fig:Two-images"
29302 \begin_layout Description
29304 \begin_inset space ~
29307 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29308 label for the reference:
29309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29310 LatexCommand labelonly
29311 reference "fig:Two-images"
29316 \begin_inset Newline newline
29319 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29320 Code, if you want to issue a command
29321 that \SpecialChar LyX
29327 , then you may want to use the
29330 \begin_inset space ~
29335 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29345 This is the form needed for e.
29346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29350 \begin_inset space \space{}
29357 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29358 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29360 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29364 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29368 \begin_layout Standard
29369 You can only use the style
29373 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29377 is always possible.
29380 \begin_layout Standard
29381 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29382 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29384 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29385 \begin_inset space ~
29389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29391 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29398 \begin_layout Standard
29399 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29403 \begin_inset space ~
29407 \begin_inset space ~
29412 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29413 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29416 \begin_inset space ~
29421 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29422 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29425 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29431 \begin_layout Standard
29432 You can change labels at any time.
29433 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29434 do not need to think about this.
29437 \begin_layout Standard
29438 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29440 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29444 \begin_layout Standard
29445 References are described in detail in the section
29446 \begin_inset space ~
29456 \begin_inset space ~
29464 \begin_layout Section
29465 Table of Contents and other Listings
29466 \begin_inset Index idx
29469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29476 \begin_inset Index idx
29479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29480 Navigating ! Outline
29486 \begin_inset Index idx
29489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29505 \begin_layout Subsection
29507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29509 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29516 \begin_layout Standard
29517 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29519 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29520 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
29522 \begin_inset space ~
29526 \begin_inset space ~
29532 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29534 If you click on it, the
29538 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29539 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29540 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29542 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29544 \begin_inset space ~
29549 that is described in section
29550 \begin_inset space ~
29554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29556 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29563 \begin_layout Standard
29564 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29565 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29567 \begin_inset space ~
29571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29573 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29577 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29579 \begin_inset space ~
29583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29585 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29589 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29591 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29594 \begin_layout Subsection
29595 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29596 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29598 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29605 \begin_layout Standard
29606 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29608 You can insert them via the
29610 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29611 List/Contents/References
29614 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29617 \begin_layout Section
29618 URLs and Hyperlinks
29619 \begin_inset Index idx
29622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29629 \begin_inset Index idx
29632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29641 \begin_layout Subsection
29643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29652 \begin_layout Standard
29653 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29661 \begin_layout Standard
29662 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29664 \begin_inset Flex URL
29667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29669 https://www.lyx.org
29677 \begin_layout Standard
29678 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29684 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29688 \begin_layout Standard
29689 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29697 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29706 \begin_layout Subsection
29708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29710 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29717 \begin_layout Standard
29718 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29720 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29723 or with the toolbar button
29730 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29739 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29740 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29741 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29743 name "LyX's homepage"
29744 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29749 , an Email address like this:
29750 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29752 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29753 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29759 , or a link to a file.
29764 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29772 \begin_layout Standard
29773 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29786 to the link target.
29789 \begin_layout Standard
29790 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29791 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29792 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29793 the text style dialog.
29794 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29798 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29800 name "LyX's homepage"
29801 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29809 \begin_layout Standard
29810 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29814 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29816 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29817 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29821 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29823 \begin_inset Newline newline
29831 \begin_inset Newline newline
29838 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29841 \begin_layout Section
29843 \begin_inset Index idx
29846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29855 name "sec:Appendices"
29862 \begin_layout Standard
29863 Appendices are created with the menu
29865 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29867 \begin_inset space ~
29871 \begin_inset space ~
29877 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29878 as the appendix part of the book.
29879 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29882 \begin_layout Standard
29883 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29884 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29885 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29886 and the subsection number.
29887 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29891 \begin_layout Standard
29893 \begin_inset space ~
29897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29899 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
29907 \begin_inset space ~
29911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29913 reference "subsec:Export"
29920 \begin_layout Section
29922 \begin_inset Index idx
29925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29934 name "sec:Bibliography"
29941 \begin_layout Standard
29942 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29944 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29945 \begin_inset space ~
29949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29951 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29958 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29963 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29964 \begin_inset space ~
29968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29970 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29975 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29976 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29977 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29981 using a bibliography database.
29984 \begin_layout Standard
29985 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29986 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29990 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29991 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29992 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29993 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29994 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29997 \begin_layout Subsection
29998 The Bibliography Environment
29999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30001 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30008 \begin_layout Standard
30013 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30015 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30024 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30026 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30027 of ASCII characters only.
30031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30033 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30036 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30042 \begin_inset Newline newline
30046 \begin_inset Flex URL
30049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30051 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30061 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30071 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30072 \begin_inset Newline newline
30079 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30080 the number of the entry.
30085 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30094 \begin_layout Standard
30095 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30097 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30100 or the toolbar button
30103 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30107 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30108 containing the available citations.
30109 Select one or more keys from the list and
30119 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30120 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30124 \begin_layout Standard
30125 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30126 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30127 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30139 \begin_layout Standard
30143 Companion Second Edition
30146 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30148 key "latexcompanion"
30156 \begin_layout Standard
30157 The \SpecialChar LyX
30158 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30159 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30169 \begin_layout Standard
30170 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30177 \begin_inset Index idx
30180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30189 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30190 the label needs to be given the form
30191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30202 Author A and Author B(Year)
30203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30210 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30217 \begin_inset space ~
30222 in the document settings
30223 \begin_inset Index idx
30226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30227 Document ! Settings
30234 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30236 \begin_inset space ~
30242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30244 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30252 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30254 Once you have done that, the
30258 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30275 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30276 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30277 These two are madatory.
30278 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30281 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30283 ) and in abrreviated form (
30290 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30291 add the abbreviated form to
30295 and the full list to the optional
30303 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30304 If specified like this,
30306 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30307 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30310 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30317 is specified, toggling
30318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30325 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30326 full and abbreviated list
30330 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30331 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30332 the citation references.
30333 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30338 \begin_layout Standard
30339 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30342 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30344 \begin_inset space ~
30352 arg "layout-paragraph"
30356 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30359 \begin_layout Subsection
30360 Bibliography databases
30361 \begin_inset Index idx
30364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30365 Bibliography ! Databases
30371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30373 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30380 \begin_layout Standard
30381 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30387 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30389 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30390 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30395 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30397 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30398 your working field in a database.
30399 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30400 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30401 list for that document.
30402 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30406 \begin_layout Standard
30407 The database is a text file with the file extension
30408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30419 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30420 The format is explained in
30421 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30428 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30430 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30432 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30438 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30439 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30440 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30442 \begin_inset Flex URL
30445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30447 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30455 \begin_layout Standard
30457 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30458 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30459 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30461 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30463 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30464 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30465 Those are addressed by
30470 \begin_inset Index idx
30473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30475 packages ! biblatex
30481 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30482 (although it has been significantly
30483 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30493 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30494 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30495 might conversely fail to correctly
30496 handle databases that use specific
30505 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30509 \begin_layout Standard
30510 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30515 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30517 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30521 \begin_inset Index idx
30524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30525 Document ! Settings
30537 \begin_inset space ~
30542 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30550 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30551 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30553 \begin_inset Index idx
30556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30557 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30566 \begin_layout Standard
30567 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30571 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30573 \begin_inset space ~
30579 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30580 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30588 Add bibliography to TOC
30590 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30595 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30596 in the document or just the cited references.
30598 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30603 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30604 differ from the encoding of the document.
30609 \begin_layout Standard
30610 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30611 style file is a text file with the file extension
30612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30623 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30624 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30625 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30626 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30628 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30634 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30635 \begin_inset Newline newline
30639 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30641 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30651 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30656 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30660 \begin_layout Standard
30661 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30666 \begin_inset Index idx
30669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30670 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30676 \begin_inset Index idx
30679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30681 packages ! biblatex
30689 \begin_layout Standard
30690 Accessing a database via
30694 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30698 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30700 \begin_inset space ~
30706 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30707 you cannot select a
30712 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30716 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30719 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30720 As for the styles, note the following.
30725 \begin_layout Standard
30730 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30743 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30744 file (text file with the file extension
30745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30756 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30757 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30759 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30763 \begin_layout Standard
30768 styles are not set in the
30771 \begin_inset space ~
30776 dialog, but in the document settings.
30777 \begin_inset Index idx
30780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30781 Document ! Settings
30786 However, in the dialog in the
30790 field, which is only visible if you use
30794 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30795 example how its heading will appear).
30796 These options are described in detail in the
30801 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30811 \begin_layout Standard
30812 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30813 \begin_inset space ~
30817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30819 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30829 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30830 Bibliography Processors
30833 \begin_layout Standard
30834 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30835 uses a bibliography processor,
30836 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30837 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30838 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30840 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30841 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30844 \begin_layout Standard
30845 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30847 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30848 You can do this on a general level in
30850 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30851 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30852 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30855 or for individual documents in
30857 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30858 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30862 The following variants are available by default:
30865 \begin_layout Description
30866 biber a specific, modern processor
30867 \begin_inset Index idx
30870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30877 developed exclusively for
30881 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30887 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30892 makes use of; if you use the
30896 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30903 \begin_layout Description
30904 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30905 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30906 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30910 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30913 \begin_layout Description
30914 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30915 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30919 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30923 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30927 features are supported.
30930 \begin_layout Standard
30931 By default (with the
30937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30938 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30951 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30952 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30953 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30956 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30957 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30970 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30971 -based bibliography styles).
30972 This should suit most needs.
30975 \begin_layout Standard
30976 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30977 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30978 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30983 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30984 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30985 You can adjust it in
30987 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30988 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30989 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30995 \begin_layout Standard
30996 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30997 can add below the selection.
30998 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30999 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31005 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31015 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31019 \begin_layout Standard
31021 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31023 These are explained in detail in section
31025 Customizing Bibliographies
31029 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31034 Additional Features
31039 \begin_layout Subsection
31041 \begin_inset Index idx
31044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31045 Bibliography ! Citation format
31051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31053 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31060 \begin_layout Standard
31061 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31066 \begin_inset space \space{}
31069 numerical citation (as
31070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31077 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31085 ) or author-year citations (as
31086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31095 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31099 \begin_layout Standard
31100 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31103 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31104 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31108 \begin_inset Index idx
31111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31112 Document ! Settings
31117 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31123 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31124 labels, is there to use
31127 \begin_inset space ~
31138 \begin_inset space ~
31143 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31146 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31153 \begin_layout Standard
31154 With a bibliography database (see
31155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31157 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31164 ) one has in contrary to the
31168 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31169 These style formats are available:
31172 \begin_layout Description
31174 \begin_inset space ~
31177 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31178 -based approached without any additional packages
31179 (simple numeric citations).
31182 \begin_layout Description
31183 Biblatex loads the package
31188 \begin_inset Index idx
31191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31193 packages ! biblatex
31198 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31200 Biblatex citation style
31204 Biblatex bibliography style
31207 Options to the package
31211 can be entered in the
31218 \begin_layout Description
31220 \begin_inset space ~
31224 \begin_inset space ~
31227 mode) loads the package
31231 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31232 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31244 behavior very closely.
31249 this option has some additional styles.
31254 styles are also supported by this variant.
31257 \begin_layout Description
31259 \begin_inset space ~
31262 (BibTeX) loads the package
31267 \begin_inset Index idx
31270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31277 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31280 \begin_layout Description
31282 \begin_inset space ~
31285 (BibTeX) loads the package
31290 \begin_inset Index idx
31293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31300 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31303 \begin_layout Standard
31312 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31314 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31323 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31325 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31326 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31328 Biblatex citation style
31331 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31337 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31341 \begin_layout Standard
31342 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31343 are available in the
31348 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31349 a name prefix such as
31350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31365 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31366 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31370 \begin_inset space \space{}
31374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31385 \begin_layout Standard
31386 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31388 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31392 \begin_inset space \space{}
31395 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31401 \begin_inset space \space{}
31405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31417 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31421 \begin_inset space ~
31429 \begin_inset space ~
31435 Here is a simple example where the text
31436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31440 \begin_inset space ~
31444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31447 appears after the reference:
31450 \begin_layout Quote
31452 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31455 key "latexcompanion"
31463 \begin_layout Standard
31464 All styles except for
31468 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31478 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31482 \begin_layout Standard
31483 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31484 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31485 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31490 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31491 multi-citation (so-called
31492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31495 qualified citation lists
31496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31502 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31507 dialog will display three columns in the field
31514 \begin_inset space ~
31522 \begin_inset space ~
31530 \begin_inset space ~
31536 If you double-click on an item's
31539 \begin_inset space ~
31547 \begin_inset space ~
31552 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31555 General text before
31561 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31564 \begin_layout Section
31566 \begin_inset Index idx
31569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31585 \begin_layout Standard
31586 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31588 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31590 \begin_inset space ~
31595 or the toolbar button
31602 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31603 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31604 by \SpecialChar LyX
31605 as the index entry.
31608 \begin_layout Standard
31609 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31611 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31612 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31614 \begin_inset space ~
31620 A light blue box labeled
31621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31632 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31633 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31637 \begin_layout Standard
31638 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31639 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31640 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31641 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31643 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31645 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31653 \begin_layout Subsection
31654 Grouping Index Entries
31655 \begin_inset Index idx
31658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31667 \begin_layout Standard
31668 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31670 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31671 lists under the entry
31672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31680 First we create the entry
31681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31689 \begin_inset space ~
31693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31695 reference "subsec:Lists"
31700 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31701 \begin_inset space ~
31705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31707 reference "sec:Itemize"
31711 , we insert the command
31714 \begin_layout Standard
31720 \begin_layout Standard
31724 \begin_layout Standard
31730 \begin_layout Standard
31731 for the enumerated list in section
31732 \begin_inset space ~
31736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31738 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31745 \begin_layout Standard
31746 The exclamation mark
31747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31754 marks the grouping levels.
31755 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31756 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31757 If we don't have an index entry for
31758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31765 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31768 \begin_layout Subsection
31770 \begin_inset Index idx
31773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31774 Index ! Page ranges
31782 \begin_layout Standard
31783 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31785 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31786 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31787 an index entry in section
31788 \begin_inset space ~
31792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31794 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31801 \begin_layout Standard
31804 Paragraph environments|(
31807 \begin_layout Standard
31808 and another entry at the end of section
31809 \begin_inset space ~
31813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31815 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31822 \begin_layout Standard
31825 Paragraph environments|)
31828 \begin_layout Standard
31830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31853 respectively start and end the index range.
31854 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31855 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31856 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31857 An example is the index entry
31858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31861 Document ! Settings
31862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31868 \begin_layout Subsection
31870 \begin_inset Index idx
31873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31874 Index ! Cross referencing
31882 \begin_layout Standard
31883 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31884 We referred for example in the index entry
31885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31893 \begin_inset space ~
31897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31899 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31903 ) to the index entry
31904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31911 in the same section using the entry
31914 \begin_layout Standard
31917 GIF|see{Image formats}
31920 \begin_layout Standard
31921 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31923 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31924 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31927 \begin_layout Subsection
31929 \begin_inset Index idx
31932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31933 Index ! Entry order
31941 \begin_layout Standard
31942 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31943 follow the rules for the index order.
31944 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31950 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31952 \begin_inset space ~
31956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31958 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31967 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31968 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31993 \begin_inset Index idx
31996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31997 Dummy entries ! maïs
32003 \begin_inset Index idx
32006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32007 Dummy entries ! maître
32013 \begin_inset Index idx
32016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32017 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32022 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32023 maïs, maison, maître.
32024 To achieve this, we use the command
32027 \begin_layout Standard
32030 previous entry@current entry
32033 \begin_layout Standard
32034 In our case we want to have
32035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32050 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32053 \begin_layout Standard
32059 \begin_layout Standard
32060 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32061 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32063 See the next subsection for an example.
32066 \begin_layout Subsection
32068 \begin_inset Index idx
32071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32072 Index ! Entry layout
32080 \begin_layout Standard
32081 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32082 \begin_inset Index idx
32085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32088 This is an italic dummy entry
32093 You can also format the page number using the character
32094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32101 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32102 -command without a backslash.
32103 We can write for example
32106 \begin_layout Standard
32109 italic page number:|textit
32112 \begin_layout Standard
32113 to get the page number in italic.
32114 \begin_inset Index idx
32117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32118 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32123 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32124 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32142 \begin_inset space ~
32148 Have a look at section
32149 \begin_inset space ~
32153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32155 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32159 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32163 \begin_layout Standard
32164 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32172 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32176 to generate the index, see section
32177 \begin_inset space ~
32181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32183 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32192 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32197 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32198 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32201 key "latexcompanion"
32214 \begin_layout Standard
32215 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32217 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32218 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32219 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32220 If so, put the following in the preamble
32223 \begin_layout Standard
32235 \begin_layout Standard
32239 \begin_layout Standard
32245 \begin_layout Standard
32246 in the index entry.
32247 \begin_inset Index idx
32250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32251 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32256 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32257 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32258 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32261 \begin_layout Standard
32262 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32263 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32264 a bold font for all index entries.
32265 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32277 documentation for details,
32278 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32280 key "makeindex,xindy"
32288 \begin_layout Subsection
32290 \begin_inset Index idx
32293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32302 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32309 \begin_layout Standard
32310 If the index generation program
32314 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32315 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32319 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32320 distribution, is used.
32324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32329 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32330 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32331 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32332 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32333 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32343 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32345 dialog, see section
32346 \begin_inset space ~
32350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32352 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32357 The available options are listed and explained in
32358 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32360 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32366 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32370 \begin_layout Standard
32371 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32372 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32375 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32376 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32380 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32381 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32384 \begin_layout Subsection
32388 \begin_layout Standard
32389 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32390 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32398 next to the standard index.
32400 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32401 that add this feature.
32408 \begin_inset Index idx
32411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32413 packages ! splitidx
32418 package to generate multiple indexes.
32419 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32425 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32427 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32435 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32436 style, but it also includes
32437 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32438 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32446 \begin_layout Standard
32447 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32448 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32450 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32451 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32454 and select the option
32456 Use multiple Indexes
32463 already contains the standard index
32464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32472 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32473 also appear as a heading) to the
32477 input field and press the
32482 The new index now also appears in the list.
32483 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32484 label color to the new index.
32487 \begin_layout Standard
32488 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32491 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32492 List/Contents/References
32498 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32499 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32500 are additional features:
32503 \begin_layout Itemize
32504 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32505 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32508 \begin_layout Itemize
32509 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32510 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32515 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32516 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32517 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32518 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32521 \begin_layout Itemize
32526 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32527 code in the name of the index.
32530 \begin_layout Section
32531 Nomenclature/Glossary
32532 \begin_inset Index idx
32535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32542 \begin_inset Index idx
32545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32576 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32583 \begin_layout Standard
32584 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32585 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32586 called nomenclature or glossary.
32589 \begin_layout Standard
32590 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32597 \begin_inset Index idx
32600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32608 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32610 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32617 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32621 \begin_layout Standard
32622 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32623 and then use the menu
32625 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32631 \begin_inset space ~
32636 or the toolbar button
32639 arg "nomencl-insert"
32644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32655 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32658 \begin_layout Standard
32659 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32660 The first is the term or
32664 that you wish to define.
32669 of the term or symbol.
32672 \begin_layout Standard
32673 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32681 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32682 code for nomenclature entries the option
32686 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32694 \begin_layout Subsection
32695 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32696 \begin_inset Index idx
32699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32700 Nomenclature ! Layout
32708 \begin_layout Standard
32709 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32713 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32720 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32728 \begin_inset Newline newline
32736 \begin_inset Newline newline
32742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32749 character starts/ends the formula.
32750 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32751 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32763 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32773 \begin_layout Standard
32774 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32775 syntax is given in section
32776 \begin_inset space ~
32780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32782 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32789 \begin_layout Standard
32793 \begin_inset space ~
32798 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32800 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32805 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32812 in this document is:
32813 \begin_inset Newline newline
32818 dummy entry for the character
32823 \begin_inset Newline newline
32835 \begin_inset space ~
32845 font use the command
32874 \begin_layout Standard
32875 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32876 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32880 \begin_inset space \space{}
32884 \begin_inset Newline newline
32900 \begin_inset Newline newline
32903 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32904 This command will make the font of all symbols
32911 \begin_inset space ~
32919 \begin_layout Standard
32920 If the characters |
32921 \begin_inset space \space{}
32925 \begin_inset space \space{}
32929 \begin_inset space \space{}
32933 \begin_inset space \space{}
32937 \begin_inset space \space{}
32940 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32941 code they need to be escaped
32942 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32943 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32944 LatexCommand nomenclature
32945 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32946 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32954 \begin_layout Subsection
32955 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32956 \begin_inset Index idx
32959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32960 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32968 \begin_layout Standard
32969 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32970 -code of the symbol
32972 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32974 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32977 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32978 LatexCommand nomenclature
32980 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32988 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32992 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32993 LatexCommand nomenclature
32996 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33002 They will be sorted by
33003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33029 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33032 will be sorted before the
33036 since the character
33037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33044 is considered in sorting.
33047 \begin_layout Standard
33048 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33051 \begin_inset space ~
33056 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33057 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33059 For the example given, you can insert
33063 in this field for the
33064 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33071 will be located before
33072 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33078 \begin_layout Standard
33079 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33084 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33094 \begin_layout Subsection
33095 Nomenclature Options
33096 \begin_inset Index idx
33099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33100 Nomenclature ! Options
33106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33108 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33115 \begin_layout Standard
33120 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33121 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33124 \begin_layout Description
33125 refeq Appends the phrase
33126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33141 to every nomenclature entry, where
33147 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33150 \begin_layout Description
33151 refpage Appends the phrase
33152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33167 to every nomenclature entry, where
33173 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33176 \begin_layout Description
33177 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33180 \begin_layout Standard
33181 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33182 class options list in the
33184 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33188 In this document the options
33195 \begin_layout Standard
33196 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33202 \begin_layout Standard
33203 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33204 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33209 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33212 \begin_layout Description
33222 \begin_layout Description
33225 nomrefpage Like the
33232 \begin_layout Description
33235 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33244 \begin_layout Description
33248 \begin_inset space ~
33254 \begin_inset space ~
33259 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33262 \begin_layout Standard
33264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33271 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33272 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33276 \begin_layout Standard
33285 \begin_inset Newline newline
33291 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33295 \begin_inset space ~
33307 unskip, see equation
33310 \begin_inset Newline newline
33317 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33318 \begin_inset Newline newline
33324 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33328 \begin_inset space ~
33345 \begin_layout Standard
33346 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33349 \begin_inset space ~
33354 in the document settings under
33357 \begin_inset space ~
33365 \begin_layout Standard
33373 \begin_inset Newline newline
33377 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33381 \begin_inset space ~
33393 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33395 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33396 \begin_inset Newline newline
33403 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33404 \begin_inset Newline newline
33408 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33412 \begin_inset space ~
33424 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33429 \begin_layout Subsection
33430 Printing the Nomenclature
33431 \begin_inset Index idx
33434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33435 Nomenclature ! Printing
33443 \begin_layout Standard
33444 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33446 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33447 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33463 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33464 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33465 You can choose between these settings:
33468 \begin_layout Description
33469 Default a space of 1
33470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33476 \begin_layout Description
33478 \begin_inset space ~
33482 \begin_inset space ~
33485 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33488 \begin_layout Description
33489 Custom custom space
33492 \begin_layout Standard
33493 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33502 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33510 For example, in order to change the name to
33514 , add the following line to the preamble:
33517 \begin_layout Standard
33530 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33533 \begin_layout Standard
33534 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33535 \begin_inset Newline newline
33550 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33553 \begin_layout Subsection
33554 Nomenclature Program
33555 \begin_inset Index idx
33558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33559 Nomenclature ! Program
33565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33567 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33574 \begin_layout Standard
33580 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33581 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33583 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33588 by adding options, see section
33589 \begin_inset space ~
33593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33595 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33600 The available options are listed and explained in
33601 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33603 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33611 \begin_layout Section
33613 \begin_inset Index idx
33616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33623 \begin_inset Index idx
33626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33627 Document ! Branches
33633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33635 name "sec:Branches"
33642 \begin_layout Standard
33643 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33644 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33645 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33646 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33649 \begin_layout Standard
33650 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33651 allows you to put text into branches.
33652 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33653 To create a branch, either select the menu
33655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33656 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33659 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33661 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33668 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33669 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33670 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33671 and whether the name of the branch should
33672 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33673 (see below for an example).
33674 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33675 to the name of the other) and to add
33676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33688 \begin_inset space ~
33691 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33692 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33695 \begin_layout Standard
33696 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33697 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33702 where you can choose a branch.
33703 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33707 \begin_layout Standard
33708 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33709 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33712 \begin_layout Standard
33713 \begin_inset Branch Question
33717 \begin_layout Standard
33722 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33730 \begin_layout Standard
33731 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33735 \begin_layout Standard
33740 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33748 \begin_layout Standard
33755 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33756 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33759 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33760 Consider for example a file
33761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33768 which has the above branches.
33770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33777 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33801 branch were inactive,
33802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33817 branch was active, likewise
33818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33833 branch was active, and
33834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33837 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33841 if both branches were active.
33842 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33843 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33849 \begin_layout Standard
33850 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33856 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33857 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33861 \begin_inset space ~
33869 \begin_layout Standard
33870 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33874 \begin_layout Standard
33880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33887 branch is deactivated.
33893 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33899 \begin_layout Standard
33900 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33901 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33902 definitions for each branch.
33903 For example you can define for the question branch
33907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33908 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33909 -syntax, see section
33910 \begin_inset space ~
33914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33916 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33928 \begin_layout Standard
33938 \begin_layout Standard
33948 \begin_layout Standard
33949 and for the answer branch
33952 \begin_layout Standard
33962 \begin_layout Standard
33972 \begin_layout Standard
33973 \begin_inset Branch Question
33977 \begin_layout Standard
33981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34009 \begin_layout Standard
34010 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34014 \begin_layout Standard
34018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34046 \begin_layout Standard
34047 Now it is possible to use the
34051 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34058 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34061 commands to obtain conditional output.
34062 Here is an example formula where only the
34069 \begin_inset Formula
34071 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34079 \begin_layout Standard
34080 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34088 \begin_layout Standard
34089 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34095 \begin_inset space \space{}
34098 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34100 For this advanced usage, see the
34106 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34111 \begin_layout Section
34113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34115 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34120 \begin_inset Index idx
34123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34132 \begin_layout Standard
34135 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34136 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34139 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34141 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34147 \begin_inset Index idx
34150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34152 packages ! hyperref
34157 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34158 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34159 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34160 part of the document.
34164 \begin_layout Standard
34165 The header information in the dialog tab
34169 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34170 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34171 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34172 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34176 \begin_inset space ~
34180 \begin_inset space ~
34185 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34186 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34187 and author entries.
34191 \begin_inset space ~
34195 \begin_inset space ~
34199 \begin_inset space ~
34204 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34207 \begin_layout Standard
34208 You can specify in the dialog tab
34212 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34217 \begin_inset space ~
34221 \begin_inset space ~
34225 \begin_inset space ~
34230 option allows long links to be split;
34233 \begin_inset space ~
34237 \begin_inset space ~
34241 \begin_inset space ~
34249 \begin_inset space ~
34254 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34257 \begin_inset space ~
34262 colors the different links.
34263 The default colors are:
34266 \begin_layout Labeling
34267 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34272 for hyperlinks and URLs
34275 \begin_layout Labeling
34276 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34284 \begin_layout Labeling
34285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34293 \begin_layout Standard
34294 but you can change these in the field
34299 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34302 \begin_layout Standard
34305 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34308 \begin_layout Standard
34313 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34314 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34315 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34318 \begin_layout Standard
34323 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34324 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34325 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34335 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34336 when opening the PDF.
34338 \begin_inset space ~
34341 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34342 \begin_inset space ~
34345 1 will only display the sections.
34348 \begin_layout Standard
34349 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34350 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34356 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34357 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34367 \begin_layout Section
34369 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34373 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34380 \begin_layout Subsection
34383 \begin_inset Index idx
34386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34396 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34403 \begin_layout Standard
34404 As \SpecialChar LyX
34405 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34406 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34407 commands and constructs,
34410 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34411 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34412 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34413 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34414 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34415 cannot support all packages and
34419 \begin_layout Standard
34420 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34421 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34422 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34426 Code box is created by the menu
34428 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34430 \begin_inset space ~
34435 or by the toolbar button
34448 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34456 \begin_layout Standard
34457 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34459 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34461 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34466 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34471 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34478 , you can write the command part
34484 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34485 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34489 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34490 Code box behind the word.
34491 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34492 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34496 \begin_layout Standard
34497 \begin_inset Graphics
34498 filename clipart/ERT.png
34506 \begin_layout Standard
34510 \begin_layout Standard
34511 This is a line with a
34515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34538 \begin_layout Standard
34539 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34547 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34548 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34549 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34550 know that the command is finished.
34558 \begin_layout Subsection
34559 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34561 \begin_inset Argument 1
34564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34565 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34572 \begin_inset Index idx
34575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34583 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34585 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34592 \begin_layout Standard
34593 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34594 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34595 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34596 uses in the background.
34597 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34598 is based on commands, you can
34599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34607 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34608 any time if you know the right commands.
34609 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34610 is the end of the day.
34611 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34612 all caption labels bold.
34613 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34615 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34619 \begin_layout Standard
34620 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34622 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34624 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34627 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34637 \begin_layout Standard
34638 As result you find that the package
34643 \begin_inset Index idx
34646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34654 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34656 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34659 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34663 \begin_inset space ~
34671 \begin_layout Standard
34676 usepackage[options]{package name}
34679 \begin_layout Standard
34680 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34681 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34682 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34683 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34686 \begin_layout Standard
34687 In your case the package name is
34692 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34697 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34698 So you add the command
34701 \begin_layout Standard
34706 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34709 \begin_layout Standard
34710 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34715 For more commands provided by the
34719 package, have a look at its documentation,
34720 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34735 \begin_layout Standard
34736 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34738 For example if you use a
34742 class, you don't need the package
34746 , you can instead write
34749 \begin_layout Standard
34754 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34759 \begin_layout Standard
34760 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34761 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34762 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34769 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34772 \begin_layout Standard
34773 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34774 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34776 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34777 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34778 Code box as described in the previous
34782 \begin_layout Standard
34783 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34784 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34787 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34789 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34797 \begin_layout Standard
34798 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34804 \begin_layout Standard
34808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34818 \begin_inset Note Note
34821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34822 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34830 \begin_layout Left Header
34831 \begin_inset Argument 1
34834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34854 \begin_inset Note Note
34857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34858 defines the header line as described below
34866 \begin_layout Center Header
34867 \begin_inset Argument 1
34870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34879 \begin_layout Right Header
34880 \begin_inset Argument 1
34883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34904 \begin_layout Left Footer
34905 \begin_inset Argument 1
34908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34929 \begin_layout Center Footer
34930 \begin_inset Argument 1
34933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34945 \begin_inset Newline newline
34949 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34955 \begin_layout Right Footer
34956 \begin_inset Argument 1
34959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34981 \begin_layout Section
34982 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34985 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34990 \begin_inset Index idx
34993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34994 Document ! Header/Footer line
35000 \begin_inset Index idx
35003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35012 \begin_layout Standard
35013 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35017 \begin_inset space ~
35028 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35034 \begin_inset space ~
35040 As a second step add in the menu
35042 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35043 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35052 Custom Header/Footerlines
35055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35059 This module offers the following 6
35060 \begin_inset space ~
35066 \begin_layout Description
35068 \begin_inset space ~
35072 \begin_inset space ~
35076 \begin_inset space ~
35080 \begin_inset space ~
35084 \begin_inset space ~
35090 \begin_layout Description
35092 \begin_inset space ~
35096 \begin_inset space ~
35100 \begin_inset space ~
35104 \begin_inset space ~
35108 \begin_inset space ~
35114 \begin_layout Standard
35115 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35116 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35119 \begin_layout Standard
35120 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35121 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35123 \begin_inset space ~
35127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35129 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35133 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35136 \begin_layout Standard
35137 \begin_inset Float figure
35144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35147 \begin_inset Tabular
35148 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35149 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35150 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35151 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35152 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35154 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35172 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35183 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35201 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35212 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35216 The normal text on the page goes here.
35217 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35219 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35220 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35225 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35234 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35245 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35263 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35274 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35292 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35310 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35315 name "fig:Page-layout"
35319 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35332 \begin_layout Standard
35333 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35341 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35345 \begin_inset space ~
35350 is set to “Default”.
35351 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35360 \begin_layout Subsection
35364 \begin_layout Standard
35365 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35366 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35367 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35368 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35370 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35372 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35375 \begin_layout Standard
35376 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35377 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35381 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35383 \begin_inset space ~
35391 \begin_layout Description
35394 thepage prints the current page number
35397 \begin_layout Description
35400 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35403 \begin_layout Description
35406 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35409 \begin_layout Description
35412 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35413 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35420 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35423 because it usually goes in a left header.
35426 \begin_layout Description
35429 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35430 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35432 It is normally used in the right header.
35435 \begin_layout Subsection
35436 Default header/footer
35439 \begin_layout Standard
35440 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35441 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35442 footer has the page number.
35443 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35444 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35445 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35448 \begin_inset space ~
35456 \begin_layout Subsection
35460 \begin_layout Standard
35461 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35462 Some pages are different.
35463 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35464 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35465 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35466 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35467 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35470 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35471 Header and footer decoration line
35474 \begin_layout Standard
35475 By default, you get a 0.4
35476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35479 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35480 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35492 in the following way:
35495 \begin_layout Standard
35502 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35505 \begin_layout Standard
35506 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35519 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35526 \begin_layout Standard
35527 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35529 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35530 \begin_inset space ~
35534 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35544 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35545 Several header/footer lines
35548 \begin_layout Standard
35549 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35550 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35551 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35553 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35568 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35569 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35571 \begin_inset space ~
35579 \begin_layout Standard
35586 headheight}{height}
35589 \begin_layout Standard
35594 is a size in standard units (e.
35595 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35599 \begin_inset space \space{}
35607 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35608 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35609 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35610 logfile with the menu
35612 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35614 \begin_inset space ~
35622 \begin_inset space ~
35627 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35632 \begin_inset Index idx
35635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35637 packages ! fancyhdr
35643 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35644 for your header/footer.
35647 \begin_layout Subsection
35651 \begin_layout Standard
35652 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35653 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35654 This example consists of the following definition:
35657 \begin_layout Description
35659 \begin_inset space ~
35668 , empty optional argument
35671 \begin_layout Description
35673 \begin_inset space ~
35676 Header empty, empty optional argument
35679 \begin_layout Description
35681 \begin_inset space ~
35690 in the optional argument
35693 \begin_layout Description
35695 \begin_inset space ~
35704 in the optional argument
35707 \begin_layout Description
35709 \begin_inset space ~
35722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35726 \begin_inset Newline newline
35730 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35737 in the optional argument
35740 \begin_layout Description
35742 \begin_inset space ~
35751 , empty optional argument
35754 \begin_layout Description
35757 headrulewidth set to 2
35758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35764 \begin_layout Standard
35765 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35766 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35772 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35782 \begin_layout Standard
35783 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35789 \begin_layout Standard
35793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35797 pagestyle{headings}
35803 \begin_inset Note Note
35806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35807 switches back to page style with the default headings
35815 \begin_layout Section
35816 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35819 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35824 \begin_inset Index idx
35827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35834 \begin_inset Index idx
35837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35846 \begin_layout Standard
35848 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35849 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35850 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35853 \begin_layout Subsection
35857 \begin_layout Standard
35858 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35864 \begin_inset Index idx
35867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35869 packages ! preview-latex
35874 (on some systems named simply
35879 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35881 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35888 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35890 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35898 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35899 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35900 -package are automatically
35901 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35905 \begin_layout Subsection
35909 \begin_layout Standard
35910 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35911 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35913 activate the option
35916 \begin_inset space ~
35923 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35929 \begin_inset space ~
35933 \begin_inset space ~
35936 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35943 \begin_inset space ~
35956 \begin_inset space ~
35961 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35964 \begin_layout Standard
35965 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35970 \begin_inset space ~
35978 \begin_inset space ~
35986 \begin_layout Standard
35987 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35988 and when you finish
35992 \begin_layout Standard
35993 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36001 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36002 generated by activating the option
36005 \begin_inset space ~
36011 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36019 \begin_layout Subsection
36020 Selected document parts
36023 \begin_layout Standard
36024 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36025 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36026 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36027 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36029 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36031 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36035 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36036 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36037 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36040 \begin_layout Standard
36041 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36048 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36060 is explained in section
36062 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36067 \begin_inset space ~
36077 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36078 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36079 the final rotated boxes,
36080 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36081 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36083 Here is the result:
36086 \begin_layout Standard
36087 \begin_inset Preview
36089 \begin_layout Standard
36094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36098 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36104 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36114 height_special "totalheight"
36119 backgroundcolor "none"
36122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36147 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36153 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36175 \begin_layout Standard
36176 Previewing works also for colors.
36177 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36196 is explained in section
36203 \begin_inset space ~
36216 \begin_layout Standard
36217 \begin_inset Preview
36219 \begin_layout Standard
36223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36242 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36247 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36266 \begin_layout Standard
36267 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36273 \begin_layout Standard
36274 If \SpecialChar LyX
36275 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36276 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36277 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36278 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36279 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36280 the \SpecialChar TeX
36282 If \SpecialChar LyX
36283 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36284 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36286 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36287 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36288 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36291 \begin_layout Subsection
36296 \begin_layout Standard
36297 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36298 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36301 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36303 \begin_inset space ~
36308 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36310 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36312 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36313 's main window, then only this selection
36314 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36315 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36316 the source view window.
36321 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36322 ; but note that if you have
36323 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36325 not just the one which is open at the time.
36328 \begin_layout Section
36329 Advanced Find and Replace
36330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36332 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36337 \begin_inset Index idx
36340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36347 \begin_inset Index idx
36350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36359 \begin_layout Subsection
36363 \begin_layout Standard
36364 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36365 allows for searching of complex,
36366 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36368 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36369 The key-features are:
36372 \begin_layout Itemize
36373 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36374 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36375 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36379 \begin_layout Itemize
36380 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36381 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36382 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36383 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36386 \begin_layout Itemize
36387 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36388 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36389 outside of mathematics environments
36392 \begin_layout Itemize
36393 Search may be widened to a specific
36398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36402 \begin_inset space ~
36405 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36406 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36413 \begin_layout Itemize
36414 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36415 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36420 \begin_inset space ~
36423 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36426 \begin_layout Subsection
36430 \begin_layout Standard
36431 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36446 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36449 ) or the toolbar button
36452 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36458 Advanced Find and Replace
36463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36467 \begin_layout Standard
36473 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36477 \begin_inset space ~
36482 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36485 arg "paragraph-break"
36489 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36490 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36494 arg "paragraph-break"
36497 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36501 searches backwards.
36504 \begin_layout Standard
36508 \begin_inset space ~
36513 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36522 \begin_inset space ~
36527 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36531 Searching for mathematics
36534 \begin_layout Standard
36535 Mathematical formulas, such as
36536 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36539 or something more complex like
36540 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36543 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36548 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36549 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36550 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36551 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36557 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36561 \begin_layout Standard
36562 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36563 This is done by switching to the
36567 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36572 This way, entering in the
36579 \begin_layout Itemize
36580 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36581 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36584 \begin_layout Itemize
36585 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36586 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36589 \begin_layout Itemize
36590 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36591 of it only within section headings.
36592 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36593 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36597 \begin_layout Itemize
36598 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36599 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36606 \begin_layout Standard
36607 The entries made in the
36611 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36614 \begin_inset space ~
36620 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36624 button or alternatively press
36627 arg "paragraph-break"
36634 while the cursor is in the
36637 \begin_inset space ~
36645 \begin_layout Standard
36646 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36648 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36652 \begin_layout Itemize
36653 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36654 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36662 with its typewriter version
36663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36677 \begin_layout Itemize
36678 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36684 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36696 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36703 (you may want to enable the
36706 \begin_inset space ~
36714 \begin_inset space ~
36719 options and disable the
36727 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36735 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36736 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36740 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36743 , or occurrences of
36744 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36748 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36754 \begin_layout Subsection
36758 \begin_layout Standard
36759 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36764 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36766 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36768 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36778 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36784 This is done with the context menu
36786 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36787 Insert Regular Expression
36789 while the cursor is in the
36794 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36795 expression matching rules
36799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36800 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36807 \begin_inset space ~
36810 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36811 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36817 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36818 same text in the document.
36819 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36820 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36823 \begin_layout Enumerate
36824 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36829 editor the fraction
36830 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36834 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36837 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36838 fractions with the given denominator.
36841 \begin_layout Enumerate
36842 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36854 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36859 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36860 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36861 Also, by inserting a
36862 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36865 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36866 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36869 \begin_layout Standard
36870 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36871 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36872 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36875 , and referring back to them through
36876 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36880 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36884 For example, try searching with the regexp
36885 \begin_inset Newline newline
36888 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36891 \begin_inset Newline newline
36894 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36897 \begin_layout Standard
36898 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36901 \begin_layout Standard
36902 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36910 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36911 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36912 sub-expressions is absolute.
36914 \begin_inset space ~
36918 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36921 always refers to the first occurrence of
36922 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36925 in all entered regexps.
36933 \begin_layout Section
36935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36937 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36942 \begin_inset Index idx
36945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36954 \begin_layout Standard
36956 has a built-in spell checker.
36959 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36966 key or the toolbar button
36969 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36972 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36973 beginning of the currently selected text.
36974 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36975 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36976 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36977 scrolled so that it is visible.
36978 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36979 n, if any could be found.
36980 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36984 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36985 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36988 \begin_layout Standard
36989 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36992 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36996 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
36997 a different one at the top of the dialog.
36999 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37000 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37003 \begin_inset space ~
37011 arg "dialog-show character"
37014 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37016 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37019 \begin_layout Standard
37020 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37021 can be downloaded from here:
37022 \begin_inset Newline newline
37026 \begin_inset Flex URL
37029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37031 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37037 \begin_inset Newline newline
37041 \begin_inset space ~
37044 files for each language.
37045 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37046 \begin_inset space ~
37049 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37050 's installation subfolder
37058 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37060 \begin_inset Newline newline
37063 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37064 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37065 but in most cases these are
37081 is the language code.
37084 \begin_layout Subsection
37088 \begin_layout Standard
37091 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37092 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37094 \begin_inset space ~
37097 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37100 you can set the following things:
37103 \begin_layout Description
37105 \begin_inset space ~
37108 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37109 should use for spell checking.
37110 Depending on your platform,
37120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37121 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37122 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37137 \begin_inset space ~
37140 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37143 \begin_layout Description
37145 \begin_inset space ~
37148 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37149 will always use the given language
37150 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37153 \begin_layout Description
37155 \begin_inset space ~
37158 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37164 \begin_inset space \space{}
37168 This should normally not be needed.
37171 \begin_layout Description
37173 \begin_inset space ~
37177 \begin_inset space ~
37180 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37192 \begin_layout Description
37194 \begin_inset space ~
37197 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37198 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37199 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37200 appear in a context menu.
37201 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37205 \begin_layout Description
37207 \begin_inset space ~
37211 \begin_inset space ~
37215 \begin_inset space ~
37218 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37222 \begin_layout Section
37224 \begin_inset Index idx
37227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37236 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37243 \begin_layout Standard
37245 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37246 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37256 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37258 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37268 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37270 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37271 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37272 which are available for many languages.
37275 \begin_layout Standard
37276 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37277 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37281 \begin_layout Subsection
37282 Setting up the thesaurus
37285 \begin_layout Standard
37294 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37298 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37303 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37309 \begin_inset space ~
37317 For instance, the US English files are named:
37320 \begin_layout Itemize
37324 \begin_layout Itemize
37328 \begin_layout Standard
37337 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37338 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37341 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37342 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37343 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37345 \begin_inset space ~
37350 ) to the path where they are installed.
37354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37355 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37356 ies, typical locations are
37362 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37366 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37370 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37373 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37379 LibreOffice-<Version>
37386 On the Mac, the default location is
37388 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37389 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37390 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37391 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37392 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37393 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37401 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37402 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37403 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37407 \begin_layout Standard
37408 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37409 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37411 \begin_inset Newline newline
37415 \begin_inset Flex URL
37418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37420 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37428 \begin_layout Standard
37429 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37430 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37432 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37433 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37434 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37436 \begin_inset space ~
37441 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37443 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37444 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37448 \begin_layout Standard
37449 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37451 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37454 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37460 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37463 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37464 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37472 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37473 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37474 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37476 \begin_inset space ~
37481 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37484 \begin_layout Subsection
37485 Using the thesaurus
37488 \begin_layout Standard
37489 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37491 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37494 or the toolbar button
37497 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37500 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37502 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37504 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37505 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37506 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37515 ), related terms (such as
37518 \begin_inset space ~
37527 ), compounds (such as
37530 \begin_inset space ~
37539 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37548 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37551 \begin_layout Standard
37552 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37553 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37557 \begin_layout Standard
37558 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37559 the dictionary, such as the above
37563 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37564 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37568 \begin_inset space \space{}
37571 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37572 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37573 For example, looking up the word form
37577 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37582 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37587 \begin_inset space \space{}
37598 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37599 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37600 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37603 \begin_layout Section
37605 \begin_inset Index idx
37608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37615 \begin_inset Index idx
37618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37619 Document ! Change Tracking
37625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37627 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37634 \begin_layout Standard
37635 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37636 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37637 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37638 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37640 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37642 \begin_inset space ~
37645 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37647 \begin_inset space ~
37655 \begin_layout Standard
37656 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37670 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37671 You can change the color in
37673 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37674 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37676 \begin_inset space ~
37680 \begin_inset space ~
37685 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37691 \begin_inset Index idx
37694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37695 Color ! Change tracking
37700 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37701 's status bar when the
37702 cursor is in changed text.
37703 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37706 arg "changes-merge"
37712 \begin_layout Standard
37713 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37715 \begin_inset Index idx
37718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37727 \begin_layout Standard
37728 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37734 \begin_layout Standard
37735 \begin_inset Graphics
37736 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37744 \begin_layout Standard
37745 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37751 \begin_layout Standard
37752 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37755 \begin_layout Standard
37756 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37762 \begin_layout Standard
37763 \begin_inset Tabular
37764 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37765 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37766 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37767 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37768 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37777 arg "changes-track"
37785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37791 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37793 \begin_inset space ~
37796 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37798 \begin_inset space ~
37807 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37816 arg "changes-output"
37824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37830 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37832 \begin_inset space ~
37835 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37837 \begin_inset space ~
37841 \begin_inset space ~
37845 \begin_inset space ~
37854 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37875 Jumps to the next change
37881 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37890 arg "change-accept"
37898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37904 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37906 \begin_inset space ~
37909 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37911 \begin_inset space ~
37920 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37929 arg "change-reject"
37937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37943 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37945 \begin_inset space ~
37948 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37950 \begin_inset space ~
37959 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37968 arg "changes-merge"
37976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37982 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37984 \begin_inset space ~
37987 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37989 \begin_inset space ~
37998 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38007 arg "all-changes-accept"
38015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38021 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38023 \begin_inset space ~
38026 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38028 \begin_inset space ~
38032 \begin_inset space ~
38041 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38050 arg "all-changes-reject"
38058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38064 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38066 \begin_inset space ~
38069 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38071 \begin_inset space ~
38075 \begin_inset space ~
38084 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38107 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38108 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38110 \begin_inset space ~
38119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38142 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38144 \begin_inset space ~
38160 \begin_layout Standard
38161 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38167 \begin_layout Standard
38168 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38188 \begin_layout Standard
38189 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38190 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38191 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38192 the next change after the current cursor position.
38193 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38194 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38195 step to the next change.
38196 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38199 \begin_layout Standard
38200 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38201 to describe a change.
38204 \begin_layout Standard
38206 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
38207 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38213 \begin_inset Index idx
38216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38224 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38226 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38233 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38239 \begin_layout Section
38240 Comparison of Documents
38241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38243 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38248 \begin_inset Index idx
38251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38252 Comparison of documents
38260 \begin_layout Standard
38261 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38264 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38268 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38269 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38271 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38273 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38277 \begin_inset space ~
38281 \begin_inset space ~
38285 \begin_inset space ~
38294 \begin_inset space ~
38298 \begin_inset space ~
38302 \begin_inset space ~
38306 \begin_inset space ~
38310 \begin_inset space ~
38314 \begin_inset space ~
38319 enables the change tracking option
38322 \begin_inset space ~
38326 \begin_inset space ~
38330 \begin_inset space ~
38335 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38338 \begin_layout Section
38339 International Support
38340 \begin_inset Index idx
38343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38344 International support
38352 \begin_layout Standard
38353 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38354 with any language you want.
38355 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38356 up \SpecialChar LyX
38358 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38360 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38368 \begin_layout Standard
38369 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38370 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38371 \begin_inset space ~
38375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38377 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38384 \begin_layout Subsection
38386 \begin_inset Index idx
38389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38396 \begin_inset Index idx
38399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38400 Document ! Settings
38406 \begin_inset Index idx
38409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38410 Document ! Language
38418 \begin_layout Standard
38421 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38422 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38425 dialog lets you set
38427 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38432 \begin_layout Standard
38437 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38442 \begin_inset space ~
38447 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38448 For details about the different encoding options see section
38449 \begin_inset space ~
38453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38455 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38462 \begin_layout Subsection
38463 Keyboard mapping configuration
38464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38466 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38473 \begin_layout Standard
38474 If you have for example a U.
38475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38478 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38479 can use an alternate keymap.
38480 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38485 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38486 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38487 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38490 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38491 \begin_inset space ~
38495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38497 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38502 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38503 which one you want to use.
38506 \begin_layout Standard
38507 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38508 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38509 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38513 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38514 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38515 one to support the characters you want.
38516 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38523 \begin_layout Chapter
38526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38528 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38535 \begin_layout Standard
38536 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38537 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38538 topic inside the user's guide.
38541 \begin_layout Section
38543 \begin_inset Index idx
38546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38555 \begin_layout Standard
38560 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38563 \begin_layout Subsection
38567 \begin_layout Standard
38568 Creates a new document.
38571 \begin_layout Subsection
38575 \begin_layout Standard
38576 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38577 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38578 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38580 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38581 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38587 \begin_layout Subsection
38591 \begin_layout Standard
38595 \begin_layout Subsection
38599 \begin_layout Standard
38600 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38601 Click there on a file to open it.
38604 \begin_layout Subsection
38606 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38610 \begin_layout Standard
38612 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38613 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38617 \begin_layout Subsection
38621 \begin_layout Standard
38622 Closes the current document.
38625 \begin_layout Subsection
38629 \begin_layout Standard
38630 Closes all opened documents.
38633 \begin_layout Subsection
38637 \begin_layout Standard
38638 Saves the actual document.
38641 \begin_layout Subsection
38645 \begin_layout Standard
38646 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38647 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
38651 \begin_layout Subsection
38653 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
38657 \begin_layout Standard
38659 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
38660 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
38666 \begin_layout Subsection
38670 \begin_layout Standard
38671 Saves all opened documents.
38674 \begin_layout Subsection
38678 \begin_layout Standard
38679 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38682 \begin_layout Subsection
38686 \begin_layout Standard
38687 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38688 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38689 It is described in the section
38691 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38696 Additional Features
38701 \begin_layout Subsection
38705 \begin_layout Standard
38706 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38707 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38709 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38710 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38714 \begin_layout Standard
38715 When using the menu entry
38718 \begin_inset space ~
38723 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38727 \begin_inset space ~
38731 \begin_inset space ~
38735 \begin_inset space ~
38740 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38741 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38744 \begin_layout Subsection
38746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38748 name "subsec:Export"
38755 \begin_layout Standard
38756 You can export your document to various file formats.
38757 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38759 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38760 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38761 during its configuration.
38764 \begin_layout Standard
38765 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38767 \begin_inset space ~
38771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38773 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38780 \begin_layout Description
38786 \begin_inset space ~
38789 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38791 \begin_inset space ~
38794 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38795 \begin_inset Newline newline
38798 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38799 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38803 \begin_layout Description
38804 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38810 \begin_layout Description
38812 \begin_inset space ~
38815 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38821 \begin_layout Description
38822 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38823 's native DVI-format.
38824 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38825 files paths or file names in your document.
38827 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38834 \begin_layout Description
38835 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
38836 in files paths or file names
38839 \begin_layout Description
38841 \begin_inset space ~
38848 ) DVI-format using the program
38850 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38853 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38857 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38865 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38873 \begin_layout Description
38875 \begin_inset space ~
38878 (cropped) the same as
38882 but with cropped page margins.
38885 \begin_layout Description
38887 \begin_inset space ~
38890 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38894 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38899 \begin_layout Description
38903 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38911 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38919 \begin_layout Description
38921 \begin_inset space ~
38925 \begin_inset space ~
38928 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38932 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38940 \begin_layout Description
38944 \begin_inset space ~
38953 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38954 source that is compilable with the program
38956 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38960 \begin_layout Description
38964 \begin_inset space ~
38969 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38970 source, additionally all images used in the document
38971 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38975 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38978 \begin_layout Description
38982 \begin_inset space ~
38987 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38988 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38989 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
38997 \begin_layout Description
39001 \begin_inset space ~
39010 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39011 source that is compilable with the program
39017 \begin_layout Description
39019 \begin_inset space ~
39023 \begin_inset space ~
39030 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39031 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39037 \begin_layout Description
39039 \begin_inset space ~
39042 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39043 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39049 \begin_inset space \space{}
39054 \begin_inset space ~
39058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39073 represent the version number)
39076 \begin_layout Description
39078 \begin_inset space ~
39082 \begin_inset space ~
39085 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39086 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39087 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39091 \begin_layout Description
39092 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39093 's internal XHTML engine
39096 \begin_layout Description
39098 \begin_inset space ~
39102 \begin_inset space ~
39106 \begin_inset space ~
39110 \begin_inset space ~
39113 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39118 For the conversion the program
39127 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39130 \begin_layout Description
39131 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39136 \begin_layout Description
39138 \begin_inset space ~
39141 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39143 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39146 For the conversion the program
39155 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39158 \begin_layout Description
39160 \begin_inset space ~
39163 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39164 For the conversion the program
39173 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39176 \begin_layout Description
39178 \begin_inset space ~
39181 (cropped) the same as
39184 \begin_inset space ~
39189 but with cropped page margins
39192 \begin_layout Description
39196 \begin_inset space ~
39201 PDF-format using the program
39205 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39208 \begin_layout Description
39212 \begin_inset space ~
39216 \begin_inset space ~
39224 \begin_inset space ~
39229 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39234 \begin_inset space \space{}
39237 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39241 \begin_layout Description
39245 \begin_inset space ~
39250 PDF-format using the program
39252 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39255 , produces PDF-files directly
39258 \begin_layout Description
39262 \begin_inset space ~
39267 PDF-format using the program
39271 , produces PDF-files directly
39274 \begin_layout Description
39278 \begin_inset space ~
39283 PDF-format using the program
39287 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39290 \begin_layout Description
39294 \begin_inset space ~
39299 PDF-format using the program
39304 , produces PDF-files directly
39307 \begin_layout Description
39311 \begin_inset space ~
39319 \begin_layout Description
39323 \begin_inset space ~
39327 \begin_inset space ~
39332 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39333 and then exported as text using the program
39338 \begin_layout Description
39343 PostScript format using the program
39351 options see section
39352 \begin_inset space ~
39356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39358 reference "subsec:General-output"
39365 \begin_layout Description
39366 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39367 source and also code in the statistical programming
39381 it is possible to use
39385 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39389 \begin_layout Standard
39390 If one of the menu entries
39397 \begin_inset space ~
39406 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39408 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39410 \begin_inset space ~
39414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39416 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39421 \begin_inset Index idx
39424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39425 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39434 \begin_layout Subsection
39438 \begin_layout Standard
39439 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39440 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39443 \begin_inset space ~
39447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39449 reference "sec:Paths"
39454 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39463 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39464 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39465 's preferences as described in section
39466 \begin_inset space ~
39470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39472 reference "subsec:Converters"
39479 \begin_layout Subsection
39480 New and Close Window
39483 \begin_layout Standard
39484 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39488 \begin_layout Subsection
39492 \begin_layout Standard
39493 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39496 \begin_layout Section
39498 \begin_inset Index idx
39501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39510 \begin_layout Subsection
39514 \begin_layout Standard
39515 Described in section
39516 \begin_inset space ~
39520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39522 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39529 \begin_layout Subsection
39530 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39533 \begin_layout Standard
39534 Described in section
39535 \begin_inset space ~
39539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39541 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39548 \begin_layout Subsection
39552 \begin_layout Standard
39553 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39554 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39557 \begin_layout Subsection
39561 \begin_layout Standard
39562 Selects the whole document.
39565 \begin_layout Subsection
39566 Find & Replace (Quick)
39569 \begin_layout Standard
39570 Described in section
39571 \begin_inset space ~
39575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39577 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39584 \begin_layout Subsection
39585 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39588 \begin_layout Standard
39589 Described in section
39590 \begin_inset space ~
39594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39596 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39603 \begin_layout Subsection
39604 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39607 \begin_layout Standard
39608 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39612 \begin_layout Subsection
39614 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39618 \begin_layout Standard
39620 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39621 Described in section
39622 \begin_inset space ~
39626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39628 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39637 \begin_layout Subsection
39639 \begin_inset Index idx
39642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39643 Paragraph ! Settings
39651 \begin_layout Standard
39652 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39653 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39657 \begin_layout Standard
39658 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39659 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39665 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39666 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39668 \begin_inset space ~
39674 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39678 \begin_layout Subsection
39680 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39684 \begin_layout Standard
39686 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39687 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39692 \begin_layout Enumerate
39694 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39695 Customize text properties by means of the
39701 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39704 ; this is described in section
39705 \begin_inset space ~
39709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39711 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39718 \begin_layout Enumerate
39720 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39721 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39723 Apply last settings
39726 \begin_layout Enumerate
39728 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39729 Change the casing of selected text (
39744 \begin_layout Subsection
39746 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39750 \begin_layout Standard
39752 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39753 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39754 text styles (in the case of this document:
39776 \begin_inset space ~
39780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39782 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39791 \begin_layout Subsection
39792 Table and Rows & Columns
39795 \begin_layout Standard
39796 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39797 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39798 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39801 \begin_layout Subsection
39805 \begin_layout Standard
39806 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39807 It will dissolve this inset.
39808 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39812 \begin_layout Subsection
39816 \begin_layout Standard
39817 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39818 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39821 \begin_layout Subsection
39822 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39825 \begin_layout Standard
39826 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39828 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39829 \begin_inset space ~
39833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39835 reference "sec:Nesting"
39840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39842 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39849 \begin_layout Section
39851 \begin_inset Index idx
39854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39863 \begin_layout Standard
39864 At the bottom of the
39868 menu the opened documents are listed.
39871 \begin_layout Subsection
39872 Open/Close all Insets
39875 \begin_layout Standard
39876 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39879 \begin_layout Subsection
39880 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39883 \begin_layout Standard
39884 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39887 \begin_layout Standard
39888 Math macros are described in the
39895 \begin_layout Subsection
39899 \begin_layout Standard
39900 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39901 \begin_inset space ~
39905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39907 reference "sec:Navigating"
39912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39914 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39921 \begin_layout Subsection
39925 \begin_layout Standard
39926 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39928 \begin_inset space ~
39932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39934 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39941 \begin_layout Subsection
39945 \begin_layout Standard
39946 Opens a window showing console messages.
39947 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39949 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39952 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39953 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39954 is processing the document.
39957 \begin_layout Subsection
39959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39961 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39966 \begin_inset Index idx
39969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39978 \begin_layout Standard
39979 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39981 All toolbars and the
39984 \begin_inset space ~
39989 can be turned on and off.
39994 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40006 \begin_inset space ~
40018 \begin_inset space ~
40023 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40027 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40034 \begin_layout Standard
40039 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40043 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40044 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40045 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40046 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40047 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40050 \begin_layout Standard
40052 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40053 \begin_inset space ~
40057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40059 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40066 \begin_layout Subsection
40070 \begin_layout Standard
40074 \begin_inset space ~
40078 \begin_inset space ~
40082 \begin_inset space ~
40086 \begin_inset space ~
40090 \begin_inset space ~
40094 \begin_inset space ~
40099 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40100 's main window vertically while
40103 \begin_inset space ~
40107 \begin_inset space ~
40111 \begin_inset space ~
40115 \begin_inset space ~
40119 \begin_inset space ~
40123 \begin_inset space ~
40128 will split it horizontally.
40129 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40130 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40131 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40132 three or more documents at the same time.
40133 To close a split view, use the menu
40136 \begin_inset space ~
40140 \begin_inset space ~
40148 \begin_layout Subsection
40152 \begin_layout Standard
40153 Closes a split view.
40156 \begin_layout Subsection
40160 \begin_layout Standard
40161 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40162 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40163 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40164 's main window fullscreen.
40165 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40166 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40169 \begin_layout Section
40171 \begin_inset Index idx
40174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40183 \begin_layout Subsection
40187 \begin_layout Standard
40188 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40189 \begin_inset space ~
40193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40195 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40206 \begin_layout Subsection
40208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40210 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40217 \begin_layout Standard
40218 Here you can insert the following characters:
40221 \begin_layout Description
40226 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40229 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40230 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40231 -packages you have installed.
40232 You can get a complete display by checking
40235 \begin_inset space ~
40241 \begin_inset Newline newline
40245 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40253 Not all characters will be visible in the
40257 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40258 dialog (see section
40259 \begin_inset space ~
40263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40265 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40269 ) can display every character.
40277 \begin_layout Description
40278 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40282 \begin_layout Description
40284 \begin_inset space ~
40288 \begin_inset space ~
40291 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40292 \begin_inset space ~
40296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40298 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40305 \begin_layout Description
40307 \begin_inset space ~
40310 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40313 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40314 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40320 \begin_layout Description
40322 \begin_inset space ~
40325 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40328 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40329 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40335 \begin_layout Description
40337 \begin_inset space ~
40340 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40344 \begin_layout Description
40346 \begin_inset space ~
40349 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40353 \begin_layout Description
40355 \begin_inset space ~
40358 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
40364 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40370 \begin_layout Description
40372 \begin_inset space ~
40375 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40379 \begin_layout Description
40381 \begin_inset space ~
40385 \begin_inset Index idx
40388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40395 \begin_inset Index idx
40398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40399 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40404 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40405 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40407 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40413 \begin_inset Index idx
40416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40424 \begin_inset Newline newline
40427 More information about this feature can be found in the
40433 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40439 \begin_layout Description
40440 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40442 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40443 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40447 \begin_layout Subsection
40451 \begin_layout Standard
40452 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40455 \begin_layout Description
40456 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40457 \begin_inset script superscript
40459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40468 \begin_layout Description
40469 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40470 \begin_inset script subscript
40472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40481 \begin_layout Description
40483 \begin_inset space ~
40486 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40487 \begin_inset space ~
40491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40493 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40500 \begin_layout Description
40502 \begin_inset space ~
40505 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40506 \begin_inset space ~
40510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40512 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40519 \begin_layout Description
40521 \begin_inset space ~
40524 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40525 \begin_inset space ~
40529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40531 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40538 \begin_layout Description
40540 \begin_inset space ~
40543 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40545 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40549 \begin_inset space \space{}
40552 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40553 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40562 To insert a fraction use the command
40567 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40571 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40580 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40587 \begin_layout Description
40589 \begin_inset space ~
40592 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40593 \begin_inset space ~
40597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40599 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40606 \begin_layout Description
40608 \begin_inset space ~
40611 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40612 \begin_inset space ~
40616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40618 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40625 \begin_layout Description
40627 \begin_inset space ~
40630 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40631 \begin_inset space ~
40635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40637 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40644 \begin_layout Description
40645 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40646 \begin_inset space ~
40650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40652 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40659 \begin_layout Description
40661 \begin_inset space ~
40664 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40665 \begin_inset space ~
40669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40671 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40678 \begin_layout Description
40680 \begin_inset space ~
40683 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40684 \begin_inset space ~
40688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40690 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40697 \begin_layout Description
40699 \begin_inset space ~
40703 \begin_inset space ~
40706 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40709 \begin_inset space ~
40713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40715 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40722 for a usage example.
40725 \begin_layout Description
40727 \begin_inset space ~
40731 \begin_inset space ~
40734 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40735 \begin_inset space ~
40739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40741 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40748 \begin_layout Description
40750 \begin_inset space ~
40753 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40754 as described in section
40755 \begin_inset space ~
40759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40761 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40768 \begin_layout Description
40770 \begin_inset space ~
40773 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40774 \begin_inset space ~
40778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40780 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40787 \begin_layout Description
40789 \begin_inset space ~
40792 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40793 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40795 \begin_inset space ~
40799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40801 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40808 \begin_layout Description
40810 \begin_inset space ~
40813 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40814 \begin_inset space ~
40818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40820 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40827 \begin_layout Description
40829 \begin_inset space ~
40833 \begin_inset space ~
40836 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40837 \begin_inset space ~
40841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40843 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40850 \begin_layout Subsection
40852 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40856 \begin_layout Standard
40858 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40859 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40860 The submenu allows you to insert
40863 \begin_layout Description
40865 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40867 \begin_inset space ~
40870 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40873 \begin_layout Description
40875 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40877 \begin_inset space ~
40881 \begin_inset space ~
40884 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40888 \begin_layout Description
40890 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
40892 \begin_inset space ~
40895 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
40898 \begin_layout Description
40900 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
40902 \begin_inset space ~
40905 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
40908 \begin_layout Description
40910 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40916 \begin_inset space ~
40919 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
40923 \begin_layout Description
40925 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
40927 \begin_inset space ~
40930 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
40933 \begin_layout Description
40935 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
40937 \begin_inset space ~
40941 \begin_inset space ~
40945 \begin_inset space ~
40948 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
40951 \begin_layout Description
40953 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
40955 \begin_inset space ~
40958 Name inserts the user name as specified in
40960 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40961 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40967 \begin_layout Description
40969 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
40971 \begin_inset space ~
40974 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
40976 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40977 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40983 \begin_layout Description
40985 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
40986 Other\SpecialChar ldots
40987 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
40988 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
40991 \begin_layout Subsection
40994 List/Contents/References
40997 \begin_layout Standard
40998 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41002 \begin_inset space ~
41023 are described in section
41024 \begin_inset space ~
41028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41030 reference "sec:toc"
41039 is described in section
41040 \begin_inset space ~
41044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41046 reference "sec:Index"
41054 is described in section
41055 \begin_inset space ~
41059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41061 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41067 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41070 is described in section
41071 \begin_inset space ~
41075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41077 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41084 \begin_layout Subsection
41088 \begin_layout Standard
41089 To insert floats, as described in section
41090 \begin_inset space ~
41094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41096 reference "sec:Floats"
41100 and in detail the chapter
41107 \begin_inset space ~
41115 \begin_layout Subsection
41119 \begin_layout Standard
41120 To insert notes, described in section
41121 \begin_inset space ~
41125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41127 reference "sec:Notes"
41134 \begin_layout Subsection
41138 \begin_layout Standard
41139 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41141 Branches are described in section
41142 \begin_inset space ~
41146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41148 reference "sec:Branches"
41155 \begin_layout Subsection
41159 \begin_layout Standard
41160 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41161 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41163 An example is the document class
41164 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41174 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41183 with three custom insets.
41186 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41190 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41196 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41199 \begin_layout Subsection
41201 \begin_inset Index idx
41204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41213 \begin_layout Standard
41214 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41216 For more information see chapter
41218 External Document Parts
41221 \begin_inset space ~
41227 \begin_layout Subsection
41229 \begin_inset Index idx
41232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41241 \begin_layout Standard
41242 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41243 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41250 \begin_inset space ~
41258 \begin_layout Subsection
41262 \begin_layout Standard
41267 dialog as described in section
41268 \begin_inset space ~
41272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41274 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41281 \begin_layout Subsection
41285 \begin_layout Standard
41290 as described in section
41291 \begin_inset space ~
41295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41297 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41304 \begin_layout Subsection
41308 \begin_layout Standard
41313 as described in section
41314 \begin_inset space ~
41318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41320 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41327 \begin_layout Subsection
41329 \begin_inset Index idx
41332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41339 \begin_inset Index idx
41342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41343 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41351 \begin_layout Standard
41352 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41353 Floats are described in section
41354 \begin_inset space ~
41358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41360 reference "sec:Floats"
41364 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41366 Multi-page Captions
41371 \begin_inset space ~
41379 \begin_layout Subsection
41383 \begin_layout Standard
41384 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41385 \begin_inset space ~
41389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41391 reference "sec:Index"
41398 \begin_layout Subsection
41402 \begin_layout Standard
41403 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41404 \begin_inset space ~
41408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41410 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41417 \begin_layout Subsection
41421 \begin_layout Standard
41422 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41423 Tables are described in section
41424 \begin_inset space ~
41428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41430 reference "sec:Tables"
41434 and in detail in the chapter
41441 \begin_inset space ~
41449 \begin_layout Subsection
41453 \begin_layout Standard
41459 Graphics are described in section
41460 \begin_inset space ~
41464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41466 reference "sec:Graphics"
41473 \begin_layout Subsection
41477 \begin_layout Standard
41478 Inserts a URL as described in section
41479 \begin_inset space ~
41483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41485 reference "subsec:URLs"
41492 \begin_layout Subsection
41496 \begin_layout Standard
41497 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41498 \begin_inset space ~
41502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41504 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41511 \begin_layout Subsection
41515 \begin_layout Standard
41516 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41517 \begin_inset space ~
41521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41523 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41530 \begin_layout Subsection
41534 \begin_layout Standard
41535 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41536 \begin_inset space ~
41540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41542 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41549 \begin_layout Subsection
41552 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41555 \begin_layout Standard
41556 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41557 environments of the same type.
41559 \begin_inset space ~
41563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41565 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41569 for an explanation.
41572 \begin_layout Subsection
41576 \begin_layout Standard
41577 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41578 title or caption of a float.
41579 Inserts a short title as described in section
41580 \begin_inset space ~
41584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41586 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41593 \begin_layout Subsection
41598 \begin_layout Standard
41599 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41600 Code box as described in section
41601 \begin_inset space ~
41605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41607 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41614 \begin_layout Subsection
41616 \begin_inset Index idx
41619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41628 \begin_layout Standard
41629 Inserts a program listings box.
41630 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41632 Program Code Listings
41637 \begin_inset space ~
41645 \begin_layout Subsection
41647 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41651 \begin_layout Standard
41653 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41654 Inserts the actual date.
41655 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41662 \begin_layout Subsection
41666 \begin_layout Standard
41667 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41668 \begin_inset space ~
41672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41674 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41681 \begin_layout Section
41683 \begin_inset Index idx
41686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41695 \begin_layout Standard
41696 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41697 \begin_inset space ~
41700 of the current document.
41701 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41704 \begin_layout Subsection
41708 \begin_layout Standard
41709 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41710 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41711 to jump, for example, between section
41712 \begin_inset space ~
41716 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41717 \begin_inset space ~
41720 2.5 and use the submenu
41723 \begin_inset space ~
41727 \begin_inset space ~
41734 \begin_inset space ~
41740 \begin_inset space ~
41744 \begin_inset space ~
41750 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41754 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41760 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41763 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41766 \begin_layout Standard
41767 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41771 \begin_inset space ~
41776 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41779 \begin_inset space ~
41784 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41787 \begin_layout Subsection
41788 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41791 \begin_layout Standard
41792 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41796 \begin_layout Subsection
41800 \begin_layout Standard
41801 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41802 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41803 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41807 \begin_inset space ~
41811 \begin_inset space ~
41819 \begin_layout Subsection
41823 \begin_layout Standard
41824 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41827 The \SpecialChar LyX
41828 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41830 \begin_inset space ~
41838 \begin_inset space ~
41843 manual for a detailed description.
41846 \begin_layout Section
41848 \begin_inset Index idx
41851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41860 \begin_layout Subsection
41864 \begin_layout Standard
41865 Change Tracking is described in section
41866 \begin_inset space ~
41870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41872 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41879 \begin_layout Subsection
41887 \begin_layout Standard
41888 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41889 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41890 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41892 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41893 to the clipboard or update the view.
41894 \begin_inset Newline newline
41897 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41901 \begin_layout Standard
41904 Open Containing Directory
41906 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41907 's temporary folder for the document.
41908 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41909 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41910 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41911 For example some journals require to send the
41915 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41919 \begin_layout Subsection
41920 Start Appendix Here
41923 \begin_layout Standard
41924 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41925 as described in section
41926 \begin_inset space ~
41930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41932 reference "sec:Appendices"
41939 \begin_layout Subsection
41941 \begin_inset space ~
41947 \begin_layout Standard
41948 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41949 default output format for the document (menu
41951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41953 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41955 \begin_inset space ~
41959 \begin_inset space ~
41965 \begin_inset space ~
41969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41971 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41975 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41978 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41979 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41981 \begin_inset space ~
41984 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41986 \begin_inset space ~
41989 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41991 \begin_inset space ~
41995 \begin_inset space ~
42001 \begin_inset space ~
42005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42007 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42011 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42012 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42014 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42015 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42017 \begin_inset space ~
42020 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42022 \begin_inset space ~
42025 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42029 \begin_inset space ~
42033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42035 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42040 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42041 when it is first configured.
42042 The default output format is
42045 \begin_inset space ~
42053 \begin_layout Subsection
42054 View (Other Formats)
42057 \begin_layout Standard
42058 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42059 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42060 actual document with an external program.
42061 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42062 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42063 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42065 All possible formats are listed in section
42066 \begin_inset space ~
42070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42072 reference "subsec:Export"
42077 You should at least see the menu entry
42082 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42084 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42086 \begin_inset space ~
42090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42092 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42097 \begin_inset Index idx
42100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42101 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42110 \begin_layout Standard
42111 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42112 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42114 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42115 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42117 \begin_inset space ~
42120 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42122 \begin_inset space ~
42125 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42129 \begin_inset space ~
42133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42135 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42140 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42141 when it is first configured.
42144 \begin_layout Subsection
42146 \begin_inset space ~
42152 \begin_layout Standard
42153 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42154 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42157 \begin_layout Subsection
42158 Update (Other Formats)
42161 \begin_layout Standard
42162 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42163 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42166 \begin_layout Subsection
42167 View Master Document
42170 \begin_layout Standard
42171 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42187 \begin_inset space ~
42192 manual for more information on this topic).
42193 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42194 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42198 \begin_inset space ~
42202 \begin_inset space ~
42207 generates the output of the whole book, while
42211 will just output the chapter alone.
42214 \begin_layout Standard
42215 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42216 in the document settings (menu
42218 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42219 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42220 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42222 \begin_inset space ~
42226 \begin_inset space ~
42232 \begin_inset space ~
42236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42238 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42242 ) or in the preferences (menu
42244 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42245 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42247 \begin_inset space ~
42250 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42252 \begin_inset space ~
42255 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42257 \begin_inset space ~
42261 \begin_inset space ~
42267 \begin_inset space ~
42271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42273 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42280 \begin_layout Subsection
42281 Update Master Document
42284 \begin_layout Standard
42285 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42301 \begin_inset space ~
42306 manual for more information on this topic).
42307 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42308 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42311 \begin_layout Standard
42312 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42313 in the document settings (menu
42315 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42316 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42317 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42319 \begin_inset space ~
42323 \begin_inset space ~
42329 \begin_inset space ~
42333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42335 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42339 ) or in the preferences (menu
42341 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42342 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42344 \begin_inset space ~
42347 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42349 \begin_inset space ~
42352 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42354 \begin_inset space ~
42358 \begin_inset space ~
42364 \begin_inset space ~
42368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42370 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42377 \begin_layout Subsection
42379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42381 name "subsec:Compressed"
42388 \begin_layout Standard
42389 Un/compresses the current document.
42390 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42391 compression (see the
42393 Additional Features
42395 manual for details).
42398 \begin_layout Subsection
42402 \begin_layout Standard
42403 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42406 \begin_layout Subsection
42410 \begin_layout Standard
42411 The document settings are described in appendix
42412 \begin_inset space ~
42416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42418 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42425 \begin_layout Section
42427 \begin_inset Index idx
42430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42439 \begin_layout Subsection
42443 \begin_layout Standard
42444 Spell checking is explained in section
42445 \begin_inset space ~
42449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42451 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42458 \begin_layout Subsection
42462 \begin_layout Standard
42463 The thesaurus is described in section
42464 \begin_inset space ~
42468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42470 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42477 \begin_layout Subsection
42479 \begin_inset Index idx
42482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42489 \begin_inset Index idx
42492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42501 \begin_layout Standard
42502 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42503 the highlighted document part.
42506 \begin_layout Subsection
42512 \begin_inset Index idx
42515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42516 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42525 \begin_layout Standard
42526 Generates with the help of the program
42528 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42531 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42532 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42533 This feature is not available on Windows.
42536 \begin_layout Subsection
42542 \begin_inset Index idx
42545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42555 \begin_layout Standard
42556 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42561 \begin_inset space ~
42566 to see the full filename paths.
42569 \begin_layout Subsection
42571 \begin_inset Index idx
42574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42583 \begin_layout Standard
42584 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42585 files as described in section
42586 \begin_inset space ~
42590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42592 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42599 \begin_layout Subsection
42601 \begin_inset Index idx
42604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42617 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42635 \begin_inset Index idx
42638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42639 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42648 \begin_layout Standard
42649 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42650 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42651 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42652 -packages and programs it needs; see
42654 \begin_inset space ~
42658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42660 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42667 \begin_layout Subsection
42671 \begin_layout Standard
42676 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42677 \begin_inset space ~
42681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42683 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42690 \begin_layout Section
42692 \begin_inset Index idx
42695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42704 \begin_layout Standard
42705 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42706 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42708 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42712 \begin_layout Standard
42716 \begin_inset space ~
42721 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42722 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42723 packages and classes found
42724 by \SpecialChar LyX
42726 \begin_inset space ~
42730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42732 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42739 \begin_layout Standard
42743 \begin_inset space ~
42748 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42753 \begin_layout Section
42755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42757 name "sec:Toolbars"
42764 \begin_layout Standard
42765 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42766 \begin_inset space ~
42770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42772 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42779 \begin_layout Standard
42780 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42781 This is described in the
42783 Additional Features
42788 \begin_layout Subsection
42790 \begin_inset Index idx
42793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42802 \begin_layout Standard
42803 \begin_inset Graphics
42804 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42812 \begin_layout Standard
42813 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42819 \begin_layout Standard
42820 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42837 \begin_inset Note Note
42840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42841 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42846 manual for more information.
42854 \begin_layout Standard
42855 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42861 \begin_layout Standard
42862 \begin_inset Tabular
42863 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42864 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42865 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42866 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42872 \begin_inset Graphics
42873 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42887 pull-down box for the environments
42900 \begin_layout Standard
42901 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42907 \begin_layout Standard
42909 \begin_inset Tabular
42910 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
42911 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42912 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42913 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42914 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42937 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42944 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42967 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42974 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42997 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43004 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43013 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43027 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43034 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43043 arg "spelling-continuously"
43051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43055 Spellcheck continuously
43061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43084 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43114 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43121 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43144 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43151 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43174 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43181 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43204 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43206 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43211 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43220 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43229 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43243 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43262 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43269 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43283 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43302 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43311 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43325 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43326 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43333 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43354 Emphasize text, function of the
43355 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43358 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43360 \begin_inset space ~
43363 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43365 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43371 arg "dialog-show character"
43382 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43403 Set text to noun style, function of the
43404 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43407 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43409 \begin_inset space ~
43412 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43414 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43420 arg "dialog-show character"
43431 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43437 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43440 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43453 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43456 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43463 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43469 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43474 arg "textstyle-apply"
43484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43489 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43490 Format text using the current settings in the
43492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43494 \begin_inset space ~
43497 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43508 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43532 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43534 \begin_inset space ~
43543 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43552 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43566 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43573 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43580 arg "tabular-insert"
43588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43594 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43607 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43610 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43623 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43626 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43633 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43642 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43654 Toggle outline window on/off,
43656 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43663 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43672 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43684 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43690 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43699 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43711 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43724 \begin_layout Subsection
43726 \begin_inset Index idx
43729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43738 \begin_layout Standard
43739 \begin_inset Graphics
43740 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43748 \begin_layout Standard
43749 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43755 \begin_layout Standard
43756 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43760 \begin_layout Standard
43761 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43767 \begin_layout Standard
43768 \begin_inset Tabular
43769 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43770 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43771 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43772 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43773 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43800 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43809 arg "layout Enumerate"
43817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43827 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43836 arg "layout Itemize"
43844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43854 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43881 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43890 arg "layout Description"
43898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43908 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43917 arg "depth-increment"
43925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43931 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43933 \begin_inset space ~
43937 \begin_inset space ~
43946 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43955 arg "depth-decrement"
43963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43969 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43971 \begin_inset space ~
43975 \begin_inset space ~
43984 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43993 arg "float-insert figure"
44001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44008 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44015 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44024 arg "float-insert table"
44032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44038 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44039 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44046 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44076 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44085 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44106 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44115 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44159 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44161 \begin_inset space ~
44170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44179 arg "nomencl-insert"
44187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44195 \begin_inset space ~
44204 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44213 arg "footnote-insert"
44221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44227 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44243 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44257 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44259 \begin_inset space ~
44268 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44291 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44292 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44294 \begin_inset space ~
44303 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44312 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44326 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44333 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44356 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44363 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44386 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44388 \begin_inset space ~
44397 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44406 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44420 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44421 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44437 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44451 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44452 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44454 \begin_inset space ~
44463 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44472 arg "dialog-show character"
44480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44486 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44488 \begin_inset space ~
44491 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44498 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44504 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44509 arg "textstyle-apply"
44517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44522 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44523 Format text using the recent settings in the
44526 arg "dialog-show character"
44535 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44544 arg "layout-paragraph"
44552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44558 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44560 \begin_inset space ~
44569 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44578 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44592 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44606 \begin_layout Subsection
44607 View/Update Toolbar
44608 \begin_inset Index idx
44611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44612 Toolbar ! View / Update
44620 \begin_layout Standard
44621 \begin_inset Graphics
44622 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44629 \begin_layout Standard
44630 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44636 \begin_layout Standard
44637 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44641 \begin_layout Standard
44642 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44648 \begin_layout Standard
44649 \begin_inset Tabular
44650 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44651 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44652 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44653 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44654 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44677 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44684 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44693 arg "buffer-update"
44701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44707 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44714 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44723 arg "master-buffer-view"
44731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44739 \begin_inset space ~
44748 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44757 arg "master-buffer-update"
44765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44771 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44773 \begin_inset space ~
44777 \begin_inset space ~
44786 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44795 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44809 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44810 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44811 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44812 Synchronize with Output
44818 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44829 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
44839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44845 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44846 View (Other Formats)
44852 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44859 arg "update-others"
44863 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
44871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44877 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44878 Update (Other Formats)
44891 \begin_layout Standard
44893 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
44894 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44900 \begin_layout Subsection
44904 \begin_layout Standard
44905 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44906 \begin_inset space ~
44910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44912 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44916 , the table toolbar
44917 \begin_inset Index idx
44920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44929 \begin_inset space ~
44934 manual and the math macro toolbar
44935 \begin_inset Index idx
44938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44951 \begin_layout Chapter
44952 The Document Settings
44953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44955 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44960 \begin_inset Index idx
44963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44964 Document ! Settings
44972 \begin_layout Standard
44976 \begin_inset space ~
44981 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44982 is called with the menu
44984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44988 You can save your document settings as default with the
44990 Save as Document Defaults
44992 button in any dialog.
44993 This will create a template named
44997 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
44998 when you create a new document without
45002 \begin_layout Standard
45007 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45008 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45011 \begin_layout Standard
45012 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45013 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45014 to find the one you are looking for.
45015 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45016 the submenus of the dialog.
45018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45022 \begin_inset space \space{}
45026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45033 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45034 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45035 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45038 \begin_layout Section
45042 \begin_layout Standard
45043 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45045 Document classes are described in section
45046 \begin_inset space ~
45050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45052 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45060 \begin_layout Standard
45064 \begin_inset space ~
45069 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45074 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45075 as a layout for a document class.
45076 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45078 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45087 \begin_layout Standard
45088 Some classes use special class options by default.
45089 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45093 and you can decide to use them or not.
45094 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45095 recommended you leave them untouched.
45100 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45101 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45106 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45108 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45114 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45115 \begin_inset Newline newline
45120 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45123 \begin_inset Newline newline
45126 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45127 distribution, see section
45132 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45134 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45147 \begin_layout Standard
45152 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45153 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45154 in the background if the child document
45155 is opened without its master.
45156 This way child documents are always compilable.
45157 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45164 \begin_inset space ~
45172 \begin_layout Standard
45173 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45184 \begin_inset Index idx
45187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45189 packages ! prettyref
45195 \begin_inset Index idx
45198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45200 packages ! refstyle
45205 for cross-references, see section
45206 \begin_inset space ~
45210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45212 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45219 \begin_layout Section
45223 \begin_layout Standard
45224 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45225 Please refer to the section
45228 \begin_inset space ~
45236 \begin_inset space ~
45241 manual for details.
45244 \begin_layout Section
45248 \begin_layout Standard
45249 Modules are explained in section
45250 \begin_inset space ~
45254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45256 reference "subsec:Modules"
45263 \begin_layout Section
45267 \begin_layout Standard
45269 \begin_inset space ~
45273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45275 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45282 \begin_layout Section
45286 \begin_layout Standard
45287 The document font settings are described in section
45288 \begin_inset space ~
45292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45294 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45301 \begin_layout Section
45305 \begin_layout Standard
45306 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45318 \begin_inset space ~
45323 and whether it should be a
45326 \begin_inset space ~
45331 can also be specified here.
45334 \begin_layout Standard
45335 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45336 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45337 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45339 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45342 \begin_layout Standard
45345 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45348 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45349 justifies the text on screen.
45350 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45352 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45356 \begin_layout Standard
45358 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45367 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45372 \begin_layout Section
45376 \begin_layout Standard
45377 This dialog is described in sections
45378 \begin_inset space ~
45382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45384 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45391 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45398 \begin_layout Section
45402 \begin_layout Standard
45403 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45404 \begin_inset space ~
45408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45410 reference "subsec:Margins"
45417 \begin_layout Section
45419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45421 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45426 \begin_inset Index idx
45429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45430 Language ! Encoding
45438 \begin_layout Standard
45439 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45440 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45441 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45443 is always encoded in utf8).
45444 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45445 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45446 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45447 -command is not known for
45448 a particular character).
45449 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45453 \begin_layout Standard
45455 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45456 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45457 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45458 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45459 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45460 's default encoding).
45461 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45462 's Unicode support covers the
45463 characters of most scripts.
45464 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45465 using one of the traditional, or
45466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45473 , encodings is necessary.
45476 \begin_layout Standard
45478 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45480 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45483 Traditional (auto-selected)
45489 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45490 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45491 the given language(s).
45493 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45497 \begin_layout Standard
45499 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45500 If you use the option
45505 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45508 If the document contains text in more than one language you
45509 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
45512 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45515 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
45516 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45517 exactly one encoding.
45518 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45523 \begin_layout Standard
45525 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
45526 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
45532 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
45533 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45537 \begin_layout Standard
45539 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
45540 Finally, you can also select
45544 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
45545 Note that this encoding is then used for
45550 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
45551 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
45555 \begin_layout Standard
45557 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
45560 Do not load inputenc
45562 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
45563 from automatically loading the
45570 \begin_inset Index idx
45573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45575 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
45577 packages ! inputenc
45583 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
45584 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
45585 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45586 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45587 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45589 Note that this option is only available for the standard
45595 Traditional (auto-selected)
45602 \begin_layout Standard
45604 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
45606 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45607 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45608 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45609 installation supports Unicode), choose
45610 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45611 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45612 is quite incomplete, so
45613 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45618 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45619 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45620 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45621 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45622 -commands is not used, because all
45623 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45624 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45625 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45626 , two new alternative engines
45627 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45629 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45631 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45634 \begin_inset space ~
45642 \begin_inset space ~
45650 \begin_inset space ~
45656 \begin_inset space ~
45660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45662 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45667 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45671 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45676 \begin_layout Standard
45680 \begin_inset space ~
45685 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45686 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45696 The possible settings are:
45699 \begin_layout Description
45700 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45702 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45703 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45707 \begin_inset space ~
45711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45713 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45720 \begin_layout Description
45721 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45722 format you will use.
45723 In many cases this will be
45728 \begin_inset Index idx
45731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45739 If the newer package
45744 \begin_inset Index idx
45747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45749 packages ! polyglossia
45754 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45755 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45756 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45758 this package will be used instead of
45765 \begin_layout Description
45767 \begin_inset space ~
45778 would be more appropriate.
45781 \begin_layout Description
45782 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45783 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45787 (for German texts), type in
45790 \begin_inset Newline newline
45795 usepackage{ngerman}
45798 \begin_layout Description
45799 None will not use a language package.
45800 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45803 \begin_layout Standard
45804 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45807 \begin_layout Description
45809 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
45811 \begin_inset space ~
45815 \begin_inset space ~
45819 \begin_inset space ~
45826 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45832 \begin_inset Index idx
45835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45837 packages ! inputenc
45843 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45844 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45845 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45851 \begin_layout Description
45852 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45854 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45855 commands, which may result in a big
45856 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45857 -commands are needed.
45859 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
45860 This is the same as the
45873 \begin_layout Description
45875 \begin_inset space ~
45879 \begin_inset space ~
45882 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45885 \begin_layout Description
45887 \begin_inset space ~
45891 \begin_inset space ~
45894 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45897 \begin_layout Description
45899 \begin_inset space ~
45902 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45905 \begin_layout Description
45907 \begin_inset space ~
45911 \begin_inset space ~
45914 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45915 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45918 \begin_layout Description
45920 \begin_inset space ~
45924 \begin_inset space ~
45927 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45931 \begin_layout Description
45933 \begin_inset space ~
45937 \begin_inset space ~
45940 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45941 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45944 \begin_layout Description
45946 \begin_inset space ~
45950 \begin_inset space ~
45954 \begin_inset space ~
45957 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45958 \begin_inset space ~
45964 \begin_layout Description
45966 \begin_inset space ~
45970 \begin_inset space ~
45974 \begin_inset space ~
45977 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45978 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
45981 \begin_layout Description
45983 \begin_inset space ~
45987 \begin_inset space ~
45990 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
45991 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
45992 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45993 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
45994 \begin_inset space ~
45998 \begin_inset space ~
46004 \begin_layout Description
46006 \begin_inset space ~
46010 \begin_inset space ~
46013 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46014 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46015 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46017 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46018 \begin_inset space ~
46022 \begin_inset space ~
46028 \begin_layout Description
46030 \begin_inset space ~
46034 \begin_inset space ~
46037 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46040 \begin_layout Description
46042 \begin_inset space ~
46046 \begin_inset space ~
46049 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46052 \begin_layout Description
46054 \begin_inset space ~
46058 \begin_inset space ~
46061 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46064 \begin_layout Description
46066 \begin_inset space ~
46069 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46072 \begin_layout Description
46074 \begin_inset space ~
46077 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46080 \begin_layout Description
46082 \begin_inset space ~
46086 \begin_inset space ~
46089 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46092 \begin_layout Description
46094 \begin_inset space ~
46098 \begin_inset space ~
46104 \begin_layout Description
46106 \begin_inset space ~
46110 \begin_inset space ~
46113 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46116 \begin_layout Description
46118 \begin_inset space ~
46122 \begin_inset space ~
46128 \begin_layout Description
46130 \begin_inset space ~
46134 \begin_inset space ~
46137 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46143 \begin_inset Index idx
46146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46153 , when using this, set the document language to
46158 \begin_layout Description
46160 \begin_inset space ~
46164 \begin_inset space ~
46167 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46172 , when using this, set the document language to
46175 \begin_inset space ~
46181 \begin_layout Description
46183 \begin_inset space ~
46187 \begin_inset space ~
46190 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46196 \begin_inset Index idx
46199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46201 packages ! japanese
46206 , when using this, set the document language to
46211 \begin_layout Description
46213 \begin_inset space ~
46217 \begin_inset space ~
46220 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46225 , when using this, set the document language to
46230 \begin_layout Description
46232 \begin_inset space ~
46236 \begin_inset space ~
46239 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46244 , when using this, set the document language to
46249 \begin_layout Description
46251 \begin_inset space ~
46254 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46257 \begin_layout Description
46259 \begin_inset space ~
46263 \begin_inset space ~
46267 \begin_inset space ~
46270 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46273 \begin_layout Description
46275 \begin_inset space ~
46279 \begin_inset space ~
46283 \begin_inset space ~
46286 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46287 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46288 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46291 \begin_layout Description
46293 \begin_inset space ~
46297 \begin_inset space ~
46303 \begin_layout Description
46305 \begin_inset space ~
46309 \begin_inset space ~
46312 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46313 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46316 \begin_layout Description
46318 \begin_inset space ~
46322 \begin_inset space ~
46325 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46331 \begin_inset Index idx
46334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46341 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46342 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46344 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46345 with the default encoding (
46347 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46353 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46354 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46359 \begin_layout Description
46361 \begin_inset space ~
46369 \begin_inset space ~
46372 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46379 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46382 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46389 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46390 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46392 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46395 \begin_layout Description
46397 \begin_inset space ~
46401 \begin_inset space ~
46404 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46410 \begin_inset Index idx
46413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46421 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46424 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46426 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46427 This used to be more comprehensive than
46430 \begin_inset space ~
46435 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46440 \begin_layout Description
46442 \begin_inset space ~
46445 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46451 \begin_inset Index idx
46454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46456 packages ! inputenc
46463 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46464 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46466 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46467 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46468 with the default encoding (
46470 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46476 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46477 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46482 \begin_layout Description
46484 \begin_inset space ~
46488 \begin_inset space ~
46492 \begin_inset space ~
46495 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46496 \begin_inset space ~
46502 \begin_layout Description
46504 \begin_inset space ~
46508 \begin_inset space ~
46512 \begin_inset space ~
46515 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46516 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46517 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46521 \begin_layout Description
46523 \begin_inset space ~
46527 \begin_inset space ~
46531 \begin_inset space ~
46534 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46535 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46538 \begin_layout Section
46540 \begin_inset Index idx
46543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46550 \begin_inset Index idx
46553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46560 \begin_inset Index idx
46563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46564 Color ! Shaded boxes
46570 \begin_inset Index idx
46573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46574 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46582 \begin_layout Standard
46583 Here you can alter the font color for the
46587 (default: black), for
46590 \begin_inset space ~
46595 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46599 (default: white) and for
46602 \begin_inset space ~
46612 sets the color back to the default.
46615 \begin_layout Standard
46616 Clicking any button showing
46624 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46625 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46626 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46627 later more quickly.
46630 \begin_layout Standard
46631 Note, if you change the
46634 \begin_inset space ~
46639 font color and use the option
46642 \begin_inset space ~
46647 in the document settings under
46650 \begin_inset space ~
46655 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46656 \begin_inset space ~
46660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46662 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46669 \begin_layout Standard
46670 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46676 \begin_layout Standard
46680 \begin_inset space ~
46689 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46692 \begin_inset space ~
46695 Code after a forced page break:
46698 \begin_layout Itemize
46699 For the page color:
46700 \begin_inset Newline newline
46707 pagecolor{color name}
46710 \begin_layout Itemize
46711 For the text color:
46712 \begin_inset Newline newline
46722 \begin_layout Standard
46723 You are restricted to one of
46759 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46766 \begin_inset space ~
46772 \begin_inset Newline newline
46775 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46776 names to refer to them:
46779 \begin_layout Itemize
46785 \begin_inset Newline newline
46790 page_backgroundcolor
46793 \begin_layout Itemize
46797 \begin_inset space ~
46803 \begin_inset Newline newline
46811 \begin_layout Itemize
46815 \begin_inset space ~
46821 \begin_inset Newline newline
46829 \begin_layout Itemize
46833 \begin_inset space ~
46839 \begin_inset Newline newline
46847 \begin_layout Standard
46848 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46851 \begin_inset space ~
46859 \begin_inset space ~
46867 \begin_layout Section
46869 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
46873 \begin_layout Standard
46875 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
46876 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
46877 \begin_inset space ~
46881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46883 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46891 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
46892 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
46895 \begin_layout Standard
46897 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
46898 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
46900 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
46903 \begin_layout Section
46907 \begin_layout Standard
46908 Here you can adjust the
46912 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46916 as described in section
46917 \begin_inset space ~
46921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46923 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46928 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
46932 \begin_layout Standard
46934 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
46935 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
46937 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
46938 of this package can be used as well.
46939 The most common one are:
46942 \begin_layout Description
46944 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
46945 right Line numbers to the right margin
46948 \begin_layout Description
46950 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
46951 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
46955 \begin_layout Description
46957 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
46958 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
46961 \begin_layout Description
46963 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
46964 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
46967 \begin_layout Description
46969 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
46971 \begin_inset space ~
46974 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
46979 \begin_layout Section
46983 \begin_layout Standard
46984 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46990 \begin_inset Index idx
46993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46995 packages ! biblatex
47005 \begin_inset Index idx
47008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47020 \begin_inset Index idx
47023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47031 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47034 Sectioned bibliography
47036 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47042 \begin_inset Index idx
47045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47047 packages ! bibtopic
47057 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47058 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47062 for the generation of the bibliography.
47063 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47064 \begin_inset space ~
47068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47070 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47077 \begin_layout Section
47081 \begin_layout Standard
47082 Here you can define the
47086 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47088 \begin_inset space ~
47092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47094 reference "sec:Index"
47101 \begin_layout Section
47105 \begin_layout Standard
47106 The PDF properties are explained in section
47107 \begin_inset space ~
47111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47113 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47120 \begin_layout Section
47124 \begin_layout Standard
47125 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47126 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47132 \begin_inset Index idx
47135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47147 \begin_inset Index idx
47150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47162 \begin_inset Index idx
47165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47177 \begin_inset Index idx
47180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47192 \begin_inset Index idx
47195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47197 packages ! mathdots
47207 \begin_inset Index idx
47210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47212 packages ! mathtools
47222 \begin_inset Index idx
47225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47237 \begin_inset Index idx
47240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47242 packages ! stackrel
47252 \begin_inset Index idx
47255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47257 packages ! stmaryrd
47267 \begin_inset Index idx
47270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47272 packages ! undertilde
47277 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47280 \begin_layout Description
47281 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47282 -errors in formulas,
47283 ensure that you have this enabled.
47286 \begin_layout Description
47287 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47288 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47289 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47293 \begin_layout Description
47294 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47297 \begin_inset space ~
47309 \begin_layout Description
47310 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47313 \begin_inset space ~
47325 \begin_layout Description
47326 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47337 \begin_layout Description
47338 mathtools is used for the math commands
47374 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47381 \begin_layout Description
47382 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47384 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47393 \begin_layout Description
47394 stackrel is used for the math command
47411 \begin_layout Description
47412 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47415 \begin_layout Description
47416 undertilde is used for the math command
47424 Accents for one Character
47433 \begin_layout Section
47435 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47437 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47443 \begin_layout Standard
47445 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47446 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47449 \begin_layout Standard
47451 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47452 The float placement options
47453 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47456 are described in the section
47459 \begin_inset space ~
47463 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47465 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47473 \begin_inset space ~
47481 \begin_layout Section
47485 \begin_layout Standard
47486 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47488 Program Code Listings
47493 \begin_inset space ~
47501 \begin_layout Section
47505 \begin_layout Standard
47506 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47514 set to be used and set the
47519 The itemize environment is described in section
47520 \begin_inset space ~
47524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47526 reference "sec:Itemize"
47533 \begin_layout Standard
47534 You can furthermore specify a
47537 \begin_inset space ~
47542 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47543 command of the desired character.
47544 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47551 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47557 \begin_inset space \space{}
47561 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47571 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47572 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47575 \begin_layout Standard
47576 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47584 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47585 -packages in the preamble (menu
47588 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47589 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47592 \begin_inset space ~
47598 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47602 usepackage{textcomp}
47605 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47609 usepackage{amssymb}
47619 \begin_layout Section
47623 \begin_layout Standard
47624 Branches are described in section
47625 \begin_inset space ~
47629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47631 reference "sec:Branches"
47638 \begin_layout Section
47640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47642 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47649 \begin_layout Standard
47650 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47653 \begin_layout Description
47655 \begin_inset space ~
47659 \begin_inset space ~
47662 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47682 View Master Document
47683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47690 Update Master Document
47691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47698 menu or the toolbar.
47699 The default is set in
47701 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47702 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47704 \begin_inset space ~
47707 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47711 \begin_inset space ~
47715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47717 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47724 \begin_layout Description
47726 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
47728 \begin_inset space ~
47732 \begin_inset space ~
47736 \begin_inset space ~
47739 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
47744 option which is needed with some packages.
47745 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
47746 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
47749 \begin_layout Description
47751 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
47753 \begin_inset space ~
47757 \begin_inset space ~
47760 Options offers settings for the
47768 \begin_layout Itemize
47772 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
47774 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
47776 \begin_inset space ~
47782 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
47784 \begin_inset space ~
47788 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
47794 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
47796 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
47797 settings for the menu
47799 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47803 \begin_inset space ~
47807 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
47810 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
47811 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
47816 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
47818 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
47820 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
47823 or a detailed description see section
47825 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47830 \begin_inset space ~
47836 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
47840 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
47844 \begin_layout Itemize
47846 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
47849 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
47851 determines whether so-called
47852 \begin_inset Quotes els
47856 \begin_inset Quotes ers
47860 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
47862 \begin_inset Quotes els
47866 \begin_inset Quotes ers
47869 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
47870 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
47871 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
47873 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
47875 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
47876 macros, you can uncheck this.
47877 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
47884 \begin_layout Description
47886 \begin_inset space ~
47890 \begin_inset space ~
47893 Options offers settings for the export format
47901 \begin_inset space ~
47906 will assure that the output follows exactly version
47907 \begin_inset space ~
47910 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
47914 \begin_inset space ~
47919 settings are described in detail in section
47921 Math Output in XHTML
47926 \begin_inset space ~
47935 \begin_inset space ~
47939 \begin_inset space ~
47944 is used for the size of equations in the output.
47947 \begin_layout Description
47949 \begin_inset space ~
47954 Save transient properties
47956 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
47957 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
47958 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
47962 \begin_layout Itemize
47963 the activation of change tracking
47966 \begin_layout Itemize
47967 the output of tracked changes
47970 \begin_layout Itemize
47971 the recording of the document directory path.
47974 \begin_layout Standard
47975 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
47976 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
47980 \begin_layout Section
47988 \begin_layout Standard
47989 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47991 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
47993 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47995 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
47999 \begin_layout Standard
48000 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48001 -syntax is given in section
48002 \begin_inset space ~
48006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48008 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48015 \begin_layout Chapter
48021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48023 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48028 \begin_inset Index idx
48031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48040 \begin_layout Standard
48041 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48043 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48047 It has the following submenus.
48050 \begin_layout Section
48054 \begin_layout Subsection
48058 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48059 User Interface File
48060 \begin_inset Index idx
48063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48064 Customization ! of toolbars
48070 \begin_inset Index idx
48073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48074 Customization ! of menus
48082 \begin_layout Standard
48083 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48084 interface (ui) file.
48085 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48093 \begin_layout Description
48098 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48101 \begin_layout Description
48108 the menu entries in popup context menus
48111 \begin_layout Description
48116 specifies the toolbar buttons
48119 \begin_layout Standard
48120 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48121 and edit the entries.
48124 \begin_layout Standard
48125 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48137 entries must be finished with an explicit
48162 and in the case of the
48163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48175 The syntax for the entries is:
48178 \begin_layout Standard
48179 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48208 \begin_layout Standard
48210 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48213 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48214 -functions are listed in the menu
48216 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48218 \begin_inset space ~
48226 \begin_layout Standard
48227 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48233 \begin_layout Standard
48234 For example, assuming you use the menu
48236 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48239 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48243 \begin_layout Standard
48244 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48268 \begin_layout Standard
48270 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48285 to have the sixth bookmark.
48288 \begin_layout Standard
48292 \begin_inset space ~
48297 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48298 's toolbar buttons.
48299 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48300 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48303 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48315 \begin_layout Standard
48318 Enable tool tips in main work area
48320 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48324 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48328 \begin_layout Standard
48333 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48334 should display in the menu
48336 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48338 \begin_inset space ~
48346 \begin_layout Subsection
48350 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48354 \begin_layout Standard
48357 Restore window layouts and geometries
48360 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48361 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48365 \begin_layout Standard
48368 Restore cursor positions
48370 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48374 \begin_layout Standard
48377 Load opened files from last session
48379 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48383 \begin_layout Standard
48386 Clear all session information
48388 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48389 sessions (cursor positions, names
48390 of last opened documents, etc.).
48393 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48397 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48402 \begin_inset Index idx
48405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48414 \begin_layout Standard
48417 Backup original documents when saving
48419 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48420 it was saved the last time.
48421 It is stored in the
48424 \begin_inset space ~
48430 \begin_inset space ~
48434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48436 reference "sec:Paths"
48440 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48443 \begin_inset space ~
48449 The backup file has the file extension
48450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48464 \begin_layout Standard
48467 Backup documents, every
48469 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48472 \begin_layout Standard
48475 Save documents compressed by default
48477 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48478 \begin_inset space ~
48482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48484 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48489 This applies to newly created documents only.
48490 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48493 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48494 Windows & work area
48497 \begin_layout Standard
48500 Open documents in tabs
48502 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48506 \begin_layout Standard
48511 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48518 \begin_inset space ~
48522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48524 reference "sec:Paths"
48528 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48535 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48536 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48537 of \SpecialChar LyX
48539 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48540 instance is created for each file.
48543 \begin_layout Standard
48546 Single close-tab button
48548 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48558 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48559 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48560 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48564 \begin_layout Standard
48565 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48573 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48574 before the change takes effect.
48582 \begin_layout Standard
48587 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48589 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
48591 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48595 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
48596 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
48597 and only want to close the view in once instance.
48600 \begin_layout Subsection
48602 \begin_inset Index idx
48605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48614 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48621 \begin_layout Standard
48622 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
48626 \begin_layout Standard
48627 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48635 This section only deals with the fonts
48639 the \SpecialChar LyX
48641 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
48644 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48645 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48656 \begin_layout Standard
48657 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48674 (depends on the system) as its
48677 \begin_inset space ~
48693 \begin_layout Standard
48694 You can change the font size with the
48701 \begin_layout Standard
48706 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
48708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48711 points have the size of 1
48712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48716 \begin_inset space ~
48720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48722 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48727 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48732 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48733 \begin_inset space ~
48737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48739 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48746 \begin_layout Subsection
48748 \begin_inset Index idx
48751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48752 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
48759 \begin_inset Index idx
48762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48771 \begin_layout Standard
48772 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48773 by choosing an item in the
48774 list and selecting the
48781 \begin_layout Standard
48782 By checking the option
48786 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
48789 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
48790 \begin_inset space ~
48794 \begin_inset space ~
48799 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
48802 \begin_layout Subsection
48804 \begin_inset Index idx
48807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48816 \begin_layout Standard
48817 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
48821 \begin_layout Standard
48826 enables previewing snippets of your document.
48827 This feature is described in section
48828 \begin_inset space ~
48832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48834 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48841 \begin_layout Standard
48842 Checking the option
48845 \begin_inset space ~
48849 \begin_inset space ~
48853 \begin_inset space ~
48858 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
48861 \begin_layout Section
48863 \begin_inset Index idx
48866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48875 \begin_layout Subsection
48879 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48883 \begin_layout Standard
48886 Cursor follows scrollbar
48888 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
48892 \begin_layout Standard
48893 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
48894 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
48895 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
48898 \begin_layout Standard
48901 Scroll below end of document
48903 is self-explanatory.
48906 \begin_layout Standard
48907 In \SpecialChar LyX
48908 one can jump from word to word by pressing
48915 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
48917 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
48918 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
48919 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
48923 \begin_layout Standard
48925 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
48928 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
48930 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
48931 paste operations (i.
48932 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48935 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
48936 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
48937 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
48938 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
48939 dissolving from insets.
48944 \begin_layout Standard
48947 Sort environments alphabetically
48949 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48952 \begin_layout Standard
48955 Group environments by their category
48957 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48960 \begin_layout Standard
48965 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
48976 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48980 \begin_layout Standard
48981 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
48986 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
48987 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
48991 \begin_layout Subsection
48993 \begin_inset Index idx
48996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49003 \begin_inset Index idx
49006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49007 Settings ! Shortcuts
49015 \begin_layout Standard
49020 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49022 Several binding files are available, among them:
49025 \begin_layout Description
49026 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49029 \begin_layout Description
49030 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49042 \begin_layout Description
49043 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49054 \begin_layout Standard
49055 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49060 , and binding files for special languages.
49061 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49066 \begin_inset space \space{}
49070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49078 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49079 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49080 will try to use the appropriate binding
49084 \begin_layout Standard
49085 Some binding files, like
49089 , only have a limited scope.
49090 When looking at the end of the file
49094 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
49097 \begin_layout Standard
49101 \begin_inset space ~
49105 \begin_inset space ~
49110 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
49111 in the selected key binding file.
49114 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49118 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
49123 \begin_inset Index idx
49126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49127 Key Bindings ! Editing
49135 \begin_layout Standard
49136 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
49137 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
49138 functions and the bound shortcuts.
49139 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
49142 Show key-bindings containing
49145 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
49146 Insert there for example as keyword
49147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49154 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
49155 functions that contain
49156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49164 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
49165 All \SpecialChar LyX
49166 functions are also listed in the file
49171 that you will find in the
49178 \begin_layout Standard
49179 For example, to add the shortcut
49187 , select the function and press the
49192 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
49193 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49196 \begin_layout Standard
49197 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49198 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49200 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49201 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49203 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49208 \begin_layout Standard
49209 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49212 \begin_layout Standard
49213 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49215 The syntax of the entries is:
49218 \begin_layout Standard
49224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49243 \begin_layout Standard
49244 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49245 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49273 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49274 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49275 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49276 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49278 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49282 , you needed to specify it as
49287 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49290 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49293 \begin_layout Subsection
49295 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49297 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49302 \begin_inset Index idx
49305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49312 \begin_inset Index idx
49315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49316 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49324 \begin_layout Standard
49325 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49326 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49327 provides keyboard maps.
49328 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49329 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49332 \begin_inset space ~
49336 \begin_inset space ~
49341 and select the keyboard map file named
49348 \begin_layout Standard
49357 keyboard map and, if you use the
49361 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49364 arg "keymap-primary"
49370 arg "keymap-secondary"
49373 respectively or toggle between them with
49376 arg "keymap-toggle"
49382 \begin_layout Standard
49383 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49391 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49400 \begin_layout Standard
49401 You can also specify the mouse
49403 Wheel scrolling speed
49406 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49410 Middle mouse button pasting
49412 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49413 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49416 \begin_layout Standard
49424 \begin_inset space ~
49428 \begin_inset space ~
49433 you can select a key for zooming.
49434 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49437 \begin_layout Subsection
49441 \begin_layout Standard
49442 Input completion is described in section
49443 \begin_inset space ~
49447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49449 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49456 \begin_layout Section
49458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49465 \begin_inset Index idx
49468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49475 \begin_inset Index idx
49478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49487 \begin_layout Standard
49488 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49489 are normally determined during
49491 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49494 \begin_layout Description
49496 \begin_inset space ~
49499 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49500 's working directory.
49501 It is the default when you
49512 \begin_inset space ~
49520 \begin_layout Description
49522 \begin_inset space ~
49525 templates This directory
49526 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
49527 contains the templates that are shown
49528 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
49529 will be opened when you use the menu
49530 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
49535 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49537 \begin_inset space ~
49541 \begin_inset space ~
49549 \begin_layout Description
49551 \begin_inset space ~
49554 files This directory
49555 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
49556 will be opened when you use the
49557 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
49558 contains the example files that are listed in
49561 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
49570 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49572 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
49574 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
49580 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
49582 \begin_inset Newline newline
49586 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49598 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
49599 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
49609 \begin_layout Description
49611 \begin_inset space ~
49615 \begin_inset Index idx
49618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49624 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
49625 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
49626 \begin_inset space ~
49630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49632 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49640 will be used to save the backups.
49641 \begin_inset Newline newline
49644 Backup files have the ending
49645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49655 \begin_layout Description
49657 \begin_inset space ~
49660 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
49661 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
49663 \begin_inset Newline newline
49670 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49676 You can edit this file with the program
49685 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
49686 in its preferences under
49689 \begin_inset space ~
49695 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
49700 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
49702 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
49703 in your \SpecialChar LyX
49709 and \SpecialChar LyX
49710 need to be running the same time.
49711 \begin_inset Newline newline
49714 The pipe is also used for the
49718 feature, see section
49719 \begin_inset space ~
49723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49725 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49730 \begin_inset Newline newline
49733 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
49734 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
49735 \begin_inset Newline newline
49751 \begin_layout Description
49753 \begin_inset space ~
49756 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49759 \begin_layout Description
49761 \begin_inset space ~
49764 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49765 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49766 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49769 \begin_layout Description
49771 \begin_inset space ~
49774 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
49780 You only need to specify it if you are using
49784 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
49786 For \SpecialChar LyX
49791 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
49795 \begin_layout Description
49797 \begin_inset space ~
49800 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
49801 When \SpecialChar LyX
49802 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
49803 to find it on the system.
49804 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
49806 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
49808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49815 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
49816 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
49819 \begin_layout Description
49821 \begin_inset space ~
49824 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
49825 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
49826 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
49827 code or in the document
49829 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
49831 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
49832 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
49833 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
49834 scanned for the input files.
49835 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
49836 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
49838 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
49839 compilation may fail for some documents.
49842 \begin_layout Section
49846 \begin_layout Standard
49847 Here you can insert your
49856 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
49858 \begin_inset space ~
49862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49864 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49868 , to mark changes you make as yours.
49871 \begin_layout Section
49873 \begin_inset Index idx
49876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49877 Language ! Settings
49883 \begin_inset Index idx
49886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49887 Settings ! Language
49895 \begin_layout Subsection
49897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49899 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
49906 \begin_layout Description
49908 \begin_inset space ~
49912 \begin_inset space ~
49915 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
49917 You can find its actual translation status here:
49918 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49920 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
49926 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
49930 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49932 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
49933 LaTeX Language Support
49938 \begin_layout Description
49940 \begin_inset space ~
49943 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
49944 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
49945 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
49946 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
49947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49963 The most widespread language package is
49968 \begin_inset Index idx
49971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49978 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
49980 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
49981 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49982 come with the alternative
49988 \begin_inset Index idx
49991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49993 packages ! polyglossia
49998 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
49999 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50005 The available selections are described in section
50006 \begin_inset space ~
50010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50012 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50019 \begin_layout Description
50021 \begin_inset space ~
50025 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50026 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50027 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50029 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50033 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50037 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50039 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50043 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50044 that is used to switch to a different language
50045 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50046 to start the package
50050 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50051 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50055 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50056 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
50059 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50063 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50071 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
50079 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
50082 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50084 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50088 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50106 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50107 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50114 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
50115 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50120 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50125 , this setting is ignored.
50130 \begin_layout Description
50132 \begin_inset space ~
50136 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
50143 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
50144 Use this if the language switch set in
50148 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
50152 's alternative command
50156 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
50157 \SpecialChar allowbreak
50160 end{otherlanguage*}
50164 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
50165 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
50166 command toggles the package on and off
50167 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
50168 Empty by default, as
50172 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50174 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
50179 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50185 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
50190 , this setting is ignored.
50195 \begin_layout Description
50197 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50199 \begin_inset space ~
50203 \begin_inset space ~
50206 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
50210 \begin_layout Description
50212 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50214 \begin_inset space ~
50218 \begin_inset space ~
50221 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50227 \begin_layout Description
50229 \begin_inset space ~
50233 \begin_inset space ~
50237 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
50239 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
50242 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
50243 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
50246 to the document class options
50247 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
50248 rather than the language package options.
50249 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
50253 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
50254 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
50256 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
50257 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
50259 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
50264 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
50265 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
50274 \begin_layout Description
50276 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
50278 \begin_inset space ~
50282 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
50284 \begin_inset space ~
50288 \begin_inset space ~
50292 \begin_inset space ~
50298 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
50300 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
50303 this option is set,
50304 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
50305 the language switch defined in
50308 \begin_inset space ~
50313 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
50314 to the document language.
50315 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
50316 This might be needed if you use a non-default
50319 \begin_inset space ~
50324 or if a package resets the document language.
50325 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
50326 usually should be the document language).
50327 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
50328 documents start with the chosen document language.
50329 When this option is not set, the
50332 \begin_inset space ~
50337 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50339 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
50342 \begin_inset space ~
50352 \begin_layout Description
50354 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
50356 \begin_inset space ~
50360 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
50362 \begin_inset space ~
50366 \begin_inset space ~
50370 \begin_inset space ~
50376 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
50380 \begin_inset space ~
50384 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
50385 Set document language explicitly
50391 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
50393 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
50399 \begin_inset space ~
50405 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
50407 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
50411 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
50413 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
50416 the end of the document.
50417 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
50421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50422 \paragraph_spacing single
50424 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
50430 \begin_layout Description
50432 \begin_inset space ~
50436 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
50438 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
50442 \begin_inset space ~
50446 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
50448 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
50450 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
50454 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
50457 in a language different
50458 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
50460 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
50463 the document language will be
50464 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
50465 marked (by default with a blue
50468 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
50470 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
50474 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
50478 \begin_layout Description
50480 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
50482 \begin_inset space ~
50486 \begin_inset space ~
50490 \begin_inset space ~
50493 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
50494 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
50495 switched via the operating system.
50496 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
50498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50501 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
50502 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
50507 \begin_layout Description
50509 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
50511 \begin_inset space ~
50515 \begin_inset space ~
50518 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
50519 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
50524 \begin_layout Description
50526 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50528 \begin_inset space ~
50532 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
50534 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50538 \begin_inset space ~
50542 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
50543 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
50544 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
50546 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
50550 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
50552 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
50553 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
50555 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50556 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
50557 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
50559 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
50564 \begin_layout Standard
50569 means that the cursor
50570 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
50571 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
50572 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
50574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50577 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
50578 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
50582 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
50584 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
50585 specific case always means: move
50589 in text (even if this means:
50595 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50596 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
50597 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
50598 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
50599 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
50600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50611 \begin_layout Standard
50613 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
50618 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
50619 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
50620 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
50624 ) when coming from the left.
50625 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
50627 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50628 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
50629 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
50634 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50636 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
50640 \begin_layout Description
50642 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
50644 \begin_inset space ~
50648 \begin_inset space ~
50651 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
50652 separator alignment).
50653 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
50655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50658 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
50659 (static) custom character here.
50662 \begin_layout Description
50664 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
50666 \begin_inset space ~
50670 \begin_inset space ~
50673 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50679 \begin_layout Subsection
50683 \begin_layout Standard
50684 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
50685 \begin_inset space ~
50689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50691 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
50698 \begin_layout Section
50702 \begin_layout Subsection
50704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50706 name "subsec:General-output"
50713 \begin_layout Description
50715 \begin_inset space ~
50718 search Commands that will be used for the menu
50720 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50722 \begin_inset space ~
50728 For a detailed description see section
50730 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50735 \begin_inset space ~
50743 \begin_layout Description
50745 \begin_inset space ~
50748 Options Options for the program
50752 that is used for the export format
50757 \begin_inset space ~
50761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50763 reference "subsec:Export"
50768 Possible options are listed in the
50773 \begin_inset Newline newline
50777 \begin_inset Flex URL
50780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50782 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
50792 \begin_layout Description
50794 \begin_inset space ~
50798 \begin_inset space ~
50801 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
50804 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50805 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
50807 \begin_inset space ~
50813 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
50816 \begin_layout Description
50818 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
50820 \begin_inset space ~
50824 \begin_inset Index idx
50827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50834 \begin_inset Index idx
50837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50838 Settings ! Date format
50843 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
50844 \begin_inset Newline newline
50848 \begin_inset Flex URL
50851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50853 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
50859 \begin_inset Newline newline
50862 For example the format
50863 \begin_inset Newline newline
50867 \begin_inset Newline newline
50870 prints the date as day/month/year.
50875 \begin_layout Description
50877 \begin_inset space ~
50881 \begin_inset space ~
50884 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
50885 is allowed to overwrite on export.
50888 \begin_layout Subsection
50894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50896 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
50901 \begin_inset Index idx
50904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50905 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
50914 \begin_layout Description
50916 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
50918 \begin_inset space ~
50926 \begin_inset space ~
50930 \begin_inset space ~
50933 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
50938 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
50959 are used for Cyrillic.
50960 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
50961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50973 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
50975 sets up in the background.
50976 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
50981 \begin_layout Description
50983 \begin_inset space ~
50987 \begin_inset space ~
50991 \begin_inset space ~
50995 \begin_inset space ~
50998 options They only have an effect when the program
51002 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
51005 \begin_layout Standard
51006 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
51007 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
51008 manuals of the applications.
51011 \begin_layout Description
51013 \begin_inset space ~
51016 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
51017 \begin_inset space ~
51021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51023 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51030 \begin_layout Description
51032 \begin_inset space ~
51035 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51036 \begin_inset space ~
51040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51042 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51049 \begin_layout Description
51051 \begin_inset space ~
51054 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51055 \begin_inset space ~
51059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51061 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
51068 \begin_layout Description
51074 \begin_inset space ~
51077 command Command for the program
51079 Check\SpecialChar TeX
51082 that is described in the section
51084 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
51089 Additional Features
51094 \begin_layout Standard
51095 There are additionally the following options:
51098 \begin_layout Description
51100 \begin_inset space ~
51104 \begin_inset space ~
51108 \begin_inset space ~
51112 \begin_inset space ~
51117 \begin_inset space ~
51120 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
51121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51138 to separate folders.
51139 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
51141 \begin_inset Index idx
51144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51151 \begin_inset Index idx
51154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51163 \begin_layout Description
51165 \begin_inset space ~
51169 \begin_inset space ~
51173 \begin_inset space ~
51177 \begin_inset space ~
51181 \begin_inset space ~
51185 \begin_inset space ~
51188 changes Removes all manually set
51194 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51195 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51197 \begin_inset space ~
51202 dialog when changing the document class.
51205 \begin_layout Section
51207 \begin_inset space ~
51211 \begin_inset Index idx
51214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51223 \begin_layout Subsection
51225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51227 name "subsec:Converters"
51232 \begin_inset Index idx
51235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51244 \begin_layout Standard
51245 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
51246 from one format to another.
51247 You can modify converters or create new ones.
51248 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
51255 \begin_inset space ~
51260 field and press the
51265 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
51269 \begin_inset space ~
51274 drop-down list, modify the
51278 field and press the
51285 \begin_layout Standard
51288 Converter File Cache
51294 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
51296 Maximum Age (in days
51299 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
51300 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
51303 \begin_layout Standard
51304 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
51305 definition, is described in the section
51316 \begin_layout Subsection
51318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51320 name "sec:File-Formats"
51325 \begin_inset Index idx
51328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51335 \begin_inset Index idx
51338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51347 \begin_layout Standard
51348 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
51358 programs that should be used for certain formats.
51361 \begin_layout Standard
51362 You can also define the
51364 Default output format
51366 that is used when you use
51368 View, Update, View Master Document
51372 Update Master Document
51378 menu or the toolbar.
51381 \begin_layout Standard
51382 More about formats and their options is described in the section
51393 \begin_layout Standard
51394 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
51396 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
51397 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
51398 This is done by specifying a
51403 More about this is described in the section
51414 \begin_layout Chapter
51415 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51417 \begin_inset Index idx
51420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51429 name "chap:Units-available-in"
51436 \begin_layout Standard
51438 \begin_inset space ~
51442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51444 reference "tab:Units"
51448 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51449 and used in this documentation.
51452 \begin_layout Standard
51453 \begin_inset Float table
51460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51461 \begin_inset Caption Standard
51463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51479 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51487 \begin_inset Tabular
51488 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
51489 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
51490 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51491 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
51492 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51575 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51579 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51641 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51645 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
51649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51884 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51916 scaled point (65536
51917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51984 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
51989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52108 % of original image width
52113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52197 \begin_layout Standard
52198 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52201 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
52208 \begin_layout Bibliography
52209 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52210 LatexCommand bibitem
52217 The \SpecialChar LyX
52219 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52222 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
52228 \begin_inset Newline newline
52232 \begin_inset Flex URL
52235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52237 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
52245 \begin_layout Bibliography
52246 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52247 LatexCommand bibitem
52248 key "latexcompanion"
52253 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
52255 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52256 Companion Second Edition.
52259 Addison-Wesley, 2004
52262 \begin_layout Bibliography
52263 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52264 LatexCommand bibitem
52270 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
52273 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
52277 Addison-Wesley, 2003
52280 \begin_layout Bibliography
52281 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52282 LatexCommand bibitem
52291 : A Document Preparation System.
52294 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
52297 \begin_layout Bibliography
52298 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52299 LatexCommand bibitem
52309 The \SpecialChar TeX
52313 Addison-Wesley, 1984
52316 \begin_layout Bibliography
52317 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52318 LatexCommand bibitem
52324 The \SpecialChar TeX
52326 \begin_inset Newline newline
52330 \begin_inset Flex URL
52333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52335 https://ctan.org/topic
52343 \begin_layout Bibliography
52344 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52345 LatexCommand bibitem
52351 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52353 \begin_inset Newline newline
52357 \begin_inset Flex URL
52360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52362 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
52370 \begin_layout Bibliography
52371 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52372 LatexCommand bibitem
52379 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52381 name "Documentation"
52382 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
52389 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52393 \begin_inset Newline newline
52397 \begin_inset Flex URL
52400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52402 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
52410 \begin_layout Bibliography
52411 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52412 LatexCommand bibitem
52419 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52421 name "Documentation"
52422 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
52427 how to use the program
52429 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52433 \begin_inset Newline newline
52437 \begin_inset Flex URL
52440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52442 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
52450 \begin_layout Bibliography
52451 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52452 LatexCommand bibitem
52459 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52461 name "Documentation"
52462 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
52467 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52473 \begin_inset Index idx
52476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52478 packages ! biblatex
52484 \begin_inset Newline newline
52488 \begin_inset Flex URL
52491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52493 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
52501 \begin_layout Bibliography
52502 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52503 LatexCommand bibitem
52510 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52512 name "Documentation"
52513 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
52518 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52524 \begin_inset Index idx
52527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52535 \begin_inset Newline newline
52539 \begin_inset Flex URL
52542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52544 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
52552 \begin_layout Bibliography
52553 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52554 LatexCommand bibitem
52561 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52563 name "Documentation"
52564 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
52574 \begin_inset Newline newline
52578 \begin_inset Flex URL
52581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52583 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
52591 \begin_layout Bibliography
52592 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52593 LatexCommand bibitem
52594 key "makeindex-man"
52600 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52603 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
52613 \begin_inset Newline newline
52617 \begin_inset Flex URL
52620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52622 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
52630 \begin_layout Bibliography
52631 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52632 LatexCommand bibitem
52639 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52641 name "Documentation"
52642 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
52652 \begin_inset Newline newline
52656 \begin_inset Flex URL
52659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52661 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
52669 \begin_layout Bibliography
52670 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52671 LatexCommand bibitem
52678 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52680 name "Documentation"
52681 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
52686 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
52688 \begin_inset Newline newline
52692 \begin_inset Flex URL
52695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52697 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
52705 \begin_layout Bibliography
52706 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52707 LatexCommand bibitem
52714 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52716 name "Documentation"
52717 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
52722 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52728 \begin_inset Index idx
52731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52739 \begin_inset Newline newline
52743 \begin_inset Flex URL
52746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52748 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
52756 \begin_layout Bibliography
52757 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52758 LatexCommand bibitem
52765 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52767 name "Documentation"
52768 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
52773 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52779 \begin_inset Index idx
52782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52784 packages ! enumitem
52790 \begin_inset Newline newline
52794 \begin_inset Flex URL
52797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52799 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
52807 \begin_layout Bibliography
52808 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52809 LatexCommand bibitem
52816 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52818 name "Documentation"
52819 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
52824 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52830 \begin_inset Index idx
52833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52835 packages ! fancyhdr
52841 \begin_inset Newline newline
52845 \begin_inset Flex URL
52848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52850 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
52858 \begin_layout Bibliography
52859 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52860 LatexCommand bibitem
52867 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52869 name "Documentation"
52870 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
52875 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52881 \begin_inset Index idx
52884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52886 packages ! hyperref
52892 \begin_inset Newline newline
52896 \begin_inset Flex URL
52899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52901 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
52909 \begin_layout Bibliography
52910 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52911 LatexCommand bibitem
52918 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52920 name "Documentation"
52921 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
52926 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52932 \begin_inset Index idx
52935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52937 packages ! microtype
52943 \begin_inset Newline newline
52947 \begin_inset Flex URL
52950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52952 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
52960 \begin_layout Bibliography
52961 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52962 LatexCommand bibitem
52969 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52971 name "Documentation"
52972 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
52977 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52983 \begin_inset Index idx
52986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52994 \begin_inset Newline newline
52998 \begin_inset Flex URL
53001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53003 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
53011 \begin_layout Bibliography
53012 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53013 LatexCommand bibitem
53020 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53022 name "Documentation"
53023 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53028 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53034 \begin_inset Index idx
53037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53039 packages ! prettyref
53045 \begin_inset Newline newline
53049 \begin_inset Flex URL
53052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53054 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
53062 \begin_layout Bibliography
53063 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53064 LatexCommand bibitem
53071 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53073 name "Documentation"
53074 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
53079 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53085 \begin_inset Index idx
53088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53090 packages ! refstyle
53096 \begin_inset Newline newline
53100 \begin_inset Flex URL
53103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53105 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
53113 \begin_layout Bibliography
53114 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53115 LatexCommand bibitem
53122 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53125 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
53130 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53132 \begin_inset Newline newline
53136 \begin_inset Flex URL
53139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53141 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
53149 \begin_layout Bibliography
53150 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53151 LatexCommand bibitem
53158 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53161 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
53166 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53168 \begin_inset Newline newline
53172 \begin_inset Flex URL
53175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53177 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
53185 \begin_layout Bibliography
53186 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53187 LatexCommand bibitem
53194 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53197 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
53202 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53203 for Cyrillic languages:
53204 \begin_inset Newline newline
53208 \begin_inset Flex URL
53211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53213 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
53221 \begin_layout Bibliography
53222 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53223 LatexCommand bibitem
53230 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53233 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
53238 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53240 \begin_inset Newline newline
53244 \begin_inset Flex URL
53247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53249 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
53257 \begin_layout Bibliography
53258 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53259 LatexCommand bibitem
53266 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53269 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
53274 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53276 \begin_inset Newline newline
53280 \begin_inset Flex URL
53283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53285 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
53293 \begin_layout Bibliography
53294 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53295 LatexCommand bibitem
53302 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53305 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
53310 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53312 \begin_inset Newline newline
53316 \begin_inset Flex URL
53319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53321 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
53329 \begin_layout Standard
53330 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53364 \begin_inset Note Note
53367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53374 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
53375 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
53376 bibliography is the second one:
53384 \begin_layout Standard
53385 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
53386 LatexCommand bibtex
53387 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
53388 options "biblio/alphadin"
53395 \begin_layout Standard
53396 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53400 \begin_layout Standard
53404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53410 pagedeclaration}[1]{
53413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53419 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
53427 \begin_inset Note Note
53430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53431 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
53432 \begin_inset space ~
53436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53438 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
53450 \begin_layout Standard
53451 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
53452 LatexCommand printnomenclature
53458 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
53459 LatexCommand printindex